Home

2013 Dodge Charger Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

1. E TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 436 Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Tire Markings i e 436 Viel a a aEa ae Tite Tdentificalion Number TIN 7222 cio 440 Compact spare Tie MEANE a uus BE Tire Terminology And Definitions 441 PUD piae SUIS TE Egape vidcatur pm Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 442 M RE E Te E TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 447 d E Tire Pressure isses 447 DES Vices etc aes Tire Inflation Pressures 005 448 SOP deducat E e tenited agn Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 450 Replacement Tires se eee d eater d 456 Radial Ply Ties css jeg METRE GING ci nsec pe sites tape pet 457 All Season Tires If Equipped apa BOE OTE ECM NDA UNS quat d Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped 451 m TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 460 Base System 5 ssa expe eee we ees 463 Snow Tires 06 aa ead ka ce y Reed ala RC dne d 451 388 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE Premium System If Equipped 465 Wi FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY General Information 005 469 PE EE ae Seen coe hie anes gone ihe l FUEL REQUIREMENTS 470 E 85 General Information 474 3 6L
2. 584 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx A Mileage or time passed whichever o o o o oe eo o og 2 Se 2 2 N comes firs 9 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 d Alal voco es S o el 9 zm Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers 2 ee ue I I gt 2 N 888 88 2 8 8 8 3 8 38 8 8 E JF S SISIFE 832 FIRING fy Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 fed years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km X X S whichever comes first E Change automatic transmission fluid and i filter if using your vehicle for any of the fol X L lowing police taxi fleet off road or fre 34 quent trailer towing five speed only RE Change automatic transmission fluid and X req filter five speed only Change transfer case fluid if using your ve hicle for any of the following police taxi X X fleet off road or frequent trailer towing All Wheel Drive Only es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 585 Ll A Mileage or time passed whichever o o oe o oe eo o og e 2 2 2 2 l comes first 5555 8 S S S 8 S S N a s 88gR S 8 9 z ex HH OrYears 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 semms9sssssssssssssslb SF sis 2 8 8 FP 9 R8 8 SIE Change the rear axle fluid and on models S equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD C change the front axle
3. Cav pos Mini er Cav bo Mini NT tridge Description tridge Description ity Fuse ity Fuse Fuse Fuse 9 30 Amp Power Locks 19 Fuse Spare Pink 20 Fuse Spare 10 30 Amp Driver Door 21 Fuse Spare ik 22 Fuse Spare Hn poe gt pRRSSEREETDOOE 23 10 Amp Fuel Door Diagnostic m Red Port 12 m 20 Amp Cigar Lighters Instru 24 15 Amp Badio S Yellow ment Panel amp Power Blu 2 EE Outlet Console Rear 35 NAA Tre P Monit 1r ressur onitor 15 40Amp HVAC Blower ma ere Green 26 E 5 use r 16 Fuse Spare e pare 27 X 25 Amp Amplifier 17 Fuse Spare Natural 18 Fuse Spare 568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Cav pes Mini c Cav bs Mini ird tridge Description tridge Description ity F Fuse ity F Fuse use use 31 25 Amp Power Seats 38 20 Amp Power Outlet Inside Natural Yellow Arm Rest 32 zz 15 Amp HVAC Module Cluster 40 Fuse Spare Blue 41 Fuse Spare 33 15 Amp Ignition Switch 42 30 Amp Rear Defrost Blue Wireless Module Pink 34 10 Amp Steering Column 43 25 Amp Rear Heated Seats Red Module Clock Natural Steering Wheel 35 10 Amp Battery Sensor 44 10 Amp Park Assist Blind Red Red Spot Camera 3
4. CONTENTS ES ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 12 B VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM Keyless Ignition Node KIN sisse 12 IF EQUIPPED sg Re Rem Rhen ane 18 KeyFob e eee een 13 Rearming Of The System 0 18 Ignition Or Accessory On Message 14 ML E Hn BM SENTRY KEYS RR 15 a a ae E Replacement Keys sscseeeeeeeveres 16 Security System Manual Override 20 Customer Key Programming 17 ee ee E E UPEER dtes a General Information 00 17 REMOTE BEE ESS ENTRY ERED sabes enti at To Unlock The Doors lessen 22 To Lock The Doors 000000005 23 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To Unlatch The Trunk 000 23 M WINDOWS occ ee ei eR rem me 40 Using The Panic Alarm 23 Power Windows sees 40 Programming Additional Transmitters 24 Wind Buffeting ss doe dee ad dose eid 43 Transmitter Battery Replacement 24 W TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE 43 General Information 00 25 W TRUNK SAFETY WARNING 44 ll REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM Bb Trunk Emergency Release 45 IP EQUIPPED 2 i00ei eee ce es he a BEDE 26 E OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS 22 2 45 How To Use Remote Start 00 26
5. Operations 35 as d dove ene Haws 126 Phone Call Features selle 132 Uconnect Phone Features 0 137 Advanced Phone Connectivity 142 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone 2 0 0 0 0000000 142 General Information 4 147 Uconnect Phone 8 4 84N cessus 148 Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav selle 148 Operation s s cis ero n RR ds 150 Phone Call Features 00040 161 Uconnect Phone Features 167 Advanced Phone Connectivity 171 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Jie eer RC eme 172 General Information 0 185 VOICE COMMAND sea s 508 4 ek eee se Gs 185 Uconnect 84 84 Nav 000006 185 Uconnect Voice Commands 188 DEALS uk C3 o KEEN OAR ERR SRS 199 Power Seats If Equipped 199 Power Lumbar If Equipped 201 Heated Seats If Equipped 202 Ventilated Seats If Equipped 205 Manual Seats If Equipped 207 Head Restraints 0000005 209 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Folding Rear Seat 6 40 0 asitiani enes 211 ll DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED 213 Programming The Memory Fea
6. Information Provided by DEALER MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 525 E ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 526 ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 527 ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 00 ee eee 527 E REPLACEMENT PARTS 529 B DEALER SERVICE 000000 ee 529 ll MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 530 Engine OH iva phew peeve RE REIR RS 531 Engine OIL Filters sese 534 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 534 Maintenance Free Battery 535 Air Conditioner Maintenance 537 Body Lubrication 2 0 0 6 ee ees 540 Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System 0 0 0 0 0c eee Cooling System llle O Brake System 0 0 eee eee 549 Automatic Transmission 00 552 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 554 Reat AXIS ehre does er oe brie RENS 554 Appearance Care And Protection From COTOS 2r e 05 ee 44 E E Re s 555 Ba FUSES o ee RR RE RES 561 Integrated Power Module 561 Rear Power Distribution Center 565 B VEHICLE STORAGE 00 00005 570 E REPLACEMENT BULBS 570 E BULB REPLACEMENT
7. sense 572 Front Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp and Side Marker Lamp Models with Halogen Headlamps 572 Front Low Beam Headlamp and Park Turn Lamp Models with High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID 00 0 573 Backup Lamps escana aeeai a Te e 574 License Lamp aac edere dsi 574 B FLUID CAPACITIES 42229 hx 6 RR IDPRER RES 576 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS cs ces er Rm 577 Engine sas petas sg pis stiene OER RR had 577 Chassis vues ea a te cece ena Be ce pus 578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L t i 4 TITTEN 074438716 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 5 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 8 7 iah 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 5 Engine Oil Fill 2 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 6 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 4 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system cal
8. T4 Donoss7 2u 3 CHARGER _ OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obliga tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured Copyright 2012 Chrysler Group LLC SECTION TABLE
9. 030440176 Slide On Rod Feature Rear Detection Zones 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK 030440174 BSM Warning Light The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de tection zones The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
10. Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch to select the particular Phone or the Paired Audio Sources soft key and then an Audio Device e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device e e e e e Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Disconnect Device soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device e e Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the currently connected device The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Delete Device soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Make Favorite soft key you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebo
11. 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM 468 STARTING AND OPERATING M message is then followed with a graphic display with 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed Vehicles With Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a low pressure mes sage and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing or in a different color An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the pressure value displayed will be updated and stop flashing
12. If Equipped When using the AutoStick shift control select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts For example choose 4 if 496 STARTING AND OPERATING ME the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed To prevent excess heat generation avoid continuous driving at high RPM Reduce vehicle speed as neces sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Two Wheel Drive And All Wheel Drive Recreational towing with all four wheels on the ground or using a tow dolly is NOT ALLOWED The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle behind an other vehicle is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS
13. Also your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist HSA Ready Alert Braking and Rain Brake Support Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability Brake Assist System BAS This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma neuvers This system detects an emergency braking situ ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake app
14. HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Training The Gar
15. It is recommended that you do not store names in your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion Phonebook Mobile and Favorites name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se SMS 68 af P FM 91 7 Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on e your phone Inbox fd 14 James Butler Listen ES 13 248 576 5459 Listen Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth in order m to use this feature If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the Mess
16. Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Transmission in NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position NOTE Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
17. This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Control Handle To unlock the steering column pull the control handle down To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 column in position push the control handle up until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column 031836848 Power Tilt Telescoping Switch To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the le
18. e Show Time In Status Bar When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Front Collision Sensitivity If Equipped The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status touch and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system
19. es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 581 NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever comes first Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip e e e e e Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System Change oil and filter Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu lar wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses and park brake Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Inspect exhaust system Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions M A l N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 L 582 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx A W Maintenance Chart N A Mileage or time passed whicheve
20. ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 498 B IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 2220s 498 E JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 499 Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 500 Preparations For Jacking 502 Jacking And Changing A Tire 503 Road Tire Installation 508 E JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 509 O Preparations For Jump Start 510 Jump Starting Procedure B FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 2 6 e ll SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 5 SPEED TRANSMISSION sess ll MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION 3 6L Engine E TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF posi
21. A m eR A w e 9 Noc bh amp QA s O Q E Rh hammers m d 8 Imm UE CUART ZUNTA DUDUD ee umm cAeme O EQ 3 inny 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title 010805185 VIN Location The vehicle identification number VIN is also located on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart ment INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING LEES Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death 010840680 VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN Information Provided by DEALER THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
22. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best 4 022667971 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secu
23. Electric Brakes 1 Female Pins 4 Park 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn es STARTING AND OPERATING 495 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing The transmission controls include an adaptive drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing However if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE you can use the AutoStick shift control if equipped to select a lower gear NOTE Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the trans mission fluid and filter as specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency AutoStick
24. KIN Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion Keyless Ignition Node KIN This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob START 2 The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle STOP should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead OR The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park
25. NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to mak
26. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 595 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of th
27. Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF NOTE The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection It is recommended to press the transfer soft key when leaving the vehicle EE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Uconnect Phone Features NOTE Emergency Assistance The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is IIS reachable The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is area ional h th b E you may reach the emergency number 3 The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that Press the button to begin for the mobile phone directly e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call Emergency or Dial Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
28. but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed f your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser MAX A C MAX A C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor mance Press and release to toggle between MAX A C and the prior settings The soft key illuminates when MAX A C is ON In MAX A C the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A C operation to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A C indicator will turn off MAX A C MAX A C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor mance Press and release to toggle between MAX A C and the prior settings The soft key illuminates when MAX A C is ON In MAX A C the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A C opera tion to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A C indicator will turn off es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379 Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or CX high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recircula
29. can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle 404 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving I
30. charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 513 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUT
31. event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition is cycled off 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some
32. fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty 472 STARTING AND OPERATING EE If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on poor engine performance poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following drain the fuel tank see your authorized d
33. in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the e button until you hear a single beep indicat ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Also you can press the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the End soft key or the button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial Press the Redial soft key e or press the button and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone wil
34. or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557 e e e e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such mat
35. readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings ram 6 The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire 464 STARTING AND OPERATING ME pressures the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive thi
36. service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that the transmission fluid E temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire Oil Change Due Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position To turn off
37. supply and drives a 7 4 channel playback architecture The Harman Kardon audio system offers the ability to choose Logic 7 surround sound for any audio source The GreenEdge high efficiency speaker designs ensure the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dy namic sound quality The speakers are tuned for maxi mum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier output stage ensuring state of the art multi seat surround sound processing Logic7 multichannel surround sound technology deliv ers an immersive accurate sound stage to every seating position This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or dashboard AUX input and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel Selecting Surround Sound through the DSS modes activates the Harman Kardon Logic7 multichannel surround sound technology in your vehicle Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode When in Surround Sound mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available in surround mode but should be set to the center position for optimal surround performance 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surfa
38. 1 000 Ibs 454 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping loaded it should have its own brakes and they distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Doo wann one egre Traller Lights And ie 1 WARNING Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size 5 Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake motoring safety system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector Continued NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness 494 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector pum Refer to the following illustrations t E 9 O O O4 Q 057003765 Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 5 Ground 987003766 9 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn Four Pin Connector 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 4
39. 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547 Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage Drain flush and refill as soon as possible to avoid damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not
40. 4 Paint Cafe d eate shaw hale gehe drea wes 555 Panic Alam sees e e rx n 23 Parking Brakes ere ae RR EE Sa Oe 424 Park Sense System Rear 000004 268 Passing Light e m RI E 226 Pedals Adjustable llle 238 POTS M ee 95 Pets Transporting cen bue y ey es 95 Placard Tire and Loading Information 443 Power Deck Lid Release 00000 43 Distribution Center Fuses 04 565 DOOF LOCKS 4 084 058 g40 S84 Shoe Sak CRS Bed 32 MUrrors secera serea Rm ex RM ERAS ees 113 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 294 Seas 22d RR RE DIEN PRPePdGe s 199 SITE oig dese d eo Da dodo d d 422 SUNTOOL s due HA ROC DURO RU he See tee 291 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 235 Windows isdem hr ERES ORE 40 Power Steering Fluid 0 0 578 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 58 Preparation for Jacking 0050 502 Pretensioners Seat Belt cscs bees ERE e WERE HE 57 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 00 21 en INDEX 611 Radial Ply Des isse i e San awe 450 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 547 Radio Operation 44 2 csse e Ex RE ae 370 Radio Remote Controls llle 368 Rain Sensitive Wiper System lesus 233 Rear Axle Differential 00 554 Rear Camera e oedi erered mit douna a sa ee edens 277 Rear Cupholder o3 4i es REFER gl
41. Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and san explode injuring you Other tme unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage yo
42. Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the orig
43. Door Ajar a e Trunk Ajar P This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk may be ajar 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Oil Pressure Warning Light CH This light indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer e If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light y This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and re
44. E JL a A w L 1 CA 9 4 040340805 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM p veni 4820 EL SP A erake SPORTA 040340806 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 2 AWD AII Wheel Drive Indicator If Equipped The AWD indicator will illuminate when All Wheel Drive AWD is activated 3 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on zb OF 4 Turn Signal Indicators Q The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 5 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped ZO This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 6 High Beam Indicator Z This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever for ward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 7 Odometer Display lElectronic Vehicle Informa
45. Engine If Equipped esses 470 Ethanol Fuel E 85 uius e ex ERO C 475 5 7L Engine If Equipped isses 470 Fuel Requirements 0000 476 Reformulated Gasoline 471 ae c a Te ir CS ABEL ORY ESR UIENGS setae sone 2A UR NETTE TT ETT TT 477 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles A71 Cruising T ccce see eia 477 PEE Se ee RSIS PAP an dite Ne Replacement Parts 0 0006 478 Materials Added To Fuel 473 Maintenance pesi recta RDUM vce 478 Fuel System Cautions 0 473 E ADDING FUEL 2c eee 478 SREGOIUMOUONMENUASENIREN duistategut mande i Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release 481 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Bl VEHICLE LOADING 000 0 482 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Vehicle Certification Label 482 xx IE ape Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 483 Trailer And Tongue Weight 488 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 483 Towing Requirements sss 489 Overloading ccecce 244 3 e Ee PER 483 TOW ie a ee MS ioadi 484 E RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND x ee E M ME MOTORHOME ETC s esses ees B TRAILER TOWING 3294084 obree Reg Ras 484 Two Wheel Drive And All Wheel Drive Common Towing Definitions 484 Trailer Hitch Classification 487 390 ST
46. Exhaust Gas Caution llle 97 Exhaust System ss y raana na enn 97 Exterior Folding Mirrors llle 112 Exterior Lighting i salem eR hes 220 Exterior Lights isses ses sn 101 Filler Location Fuel ssegar iaae aa i aa ae 318 Filters AirCleanef 2342249 a ireset IPS EAS 534 Air Conditioning i exem reme Rm or a 382 Engine Oil esrb PRSE SUE 534 Engine Oil Disposal 005 534 Flashers Hazard Warning selle 498 Turn Signal ssh ad eR a e RR ES 101 Flash To Pass 6 6 ee 226 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range 1 6 eee 477 Engine OW iu cage aie aah he eee ta quer gud 477 Fuel Requirements 00000005 474 Maintenance s Srusi pang nn EE eee 478 Replacement Parts 478 Staring DET 477 Flooded Engine Starting ses s casis me lille 393 Floor Console 0 000000 ee eee 302 604 INDEX ees Fluid Brake cue baec doge we e edere nee s 578 Fluid Capacities i 2 ab cnet oe oa 576 Fid Leaks i uud RE Pu dle eed eas 101 Fluid Level Checks 0 00 00 cee eee 554 Automatic Transmission 553 Brake 2 beg 6 alee ee eR dun a ee OE 550 Cooling System cos dsos maci pgod eei aa es 544 Engine Oll 3 ose doe RR RE rr 531 Transfer Case c sra panne Ec a a 554 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 577 Pog lights esee em eme gems 224 Folding Rear Seat 6 0 liess ees 211 Forward Collision Warning liess 266 Freeing A Stuck V
47. If your vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two fuels For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat ing between E 85 and unleaded gasoline is recom mended When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C ee STARTING AND OPERATING 477 e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification
48. Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema 2o turely Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted Trunk Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode The engine can be started two consecutive times two 1
49. Lap Shoulder Belts 49 BUPOCH TOR a A a ee Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 54 Metal Doct Hoch ayaa guis qpdirequguido a Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 55 Power Door Locks llle 32 Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR Child Protection Door Lock System It Equipped s cere aha eink s s 55 Reat Doors ces c ek eh e doe Re 33 Energy Management Feature 56 ll KEYLESS ENTER N GO 35 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Seat Belt Pretensioners 57 Transporting Pets 2499s e x ees 95 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System E ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 95 db M C M CREE ub ono NER d2 a a WOMEN lasptiatasgvs a Transporting Passengers 000 97 Seat Belt Extender 0 00000 58 aa Ga d ja 97 FI An ooo eite ku gy Ee Check Nou Stout MR Tarde The Vehicle exe Sx eme e EP ep Y E des 98 Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 65 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Event Data Recorder EDR 73 Make Outside The Vehicle 100 Child Restraints cc ed be eae 74 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node
50. MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard STARTING AND OPERATING 443 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual 444 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here 1 Locate the state
51. OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION np ceea deishe saa pes bera suat uirbadsietka drea SUIS Eta Rida Edd 3 HEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE sisse eee 9 LN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0 0 0 e 103 mm UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL leen 309 s STARTING AND OPERATING aua Deuda theod kv debe w ere Dau v pa Ea IHR Ud 385 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 tre sa e E REDE EY TTE EPOR RUE ERU Rd d 497 m MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4299 534p 3 CER EDUC R ERR TE MW SIUE SU b RR 523 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 4 6uid eade S PR ERES VOCE e EUER ean de ao dd 579 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE con sisckovatssednebesenatevansenewenass 587 9 INDEX ss 597 10 Information Provided by DEALER INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION eeeeenn nnn nBRR 4 Bi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 6 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4 BM VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 7 M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 6 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering special
52. Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen e Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support visit the following website e www UconnectPhone com e or call 1 877 855 8400 If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use All atten tion should be focused on safely operating the ve hicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global s
53. STARTING AND OPERATING 411 WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup 412 STARTING AND OPERATING ME SPORT IF EQUIP
54. Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended 578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sa Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant Or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission 8 Speed We recommend you use Shell L12108 Transmission Fluid Transmission Automatic Transmission 5 Speed We recommend you use MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Transmission Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS 11655 such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s Front Axle We recommend you use API GL 5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant Rear Axle We recommend you use API GL 5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44 40 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 580 Maintenance Chart llle 582 M A N T E N A N e I S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N ie E S ie H E D U L E S 8 580 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Ba
55. Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make
56. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the
57. Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Fuel Saver Display In Cluster The ECO message is located in the instrument cluster display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting ha
58. Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible Keep tires properly inflated Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you EE STARTING AND OPERATING 421 Shallow Standing Water CAUTION Continued Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Driving through standing water may cau
59. a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera tures 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The ventilated seats can be operated using the Uconnect System Front Ventilated Seat Operation Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect display Sy 7 OFF L Controis Climate More Player Controls Soft Key Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level ventilation Press the soft key a second time to select LO level ventilation Press the soft key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation t FM 91 7 Controls x Passenger is Sunshe Heated Seat Vented Seat V Heated Wheel 6FR L Clirnate j Radio Player More 030564881 Controls Ventilated Seats Soft Keys NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Vehicles Equipped With Re
60. a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone kevpad you can utilize the touch screen or press the Sve button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the EVR button and say Send 374 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry with First and or Last Name as Voicemail Password then if you press the EvRbutton and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Blueto
61. an ongoing call from your paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period Performance is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 e When navigating through an automated system such Far End Audio Performance as voice mail or when sending a page before speaking the digit string make sure to say Send
62. any of the satellite music 2 You can replace 80 s on 8 with any other satellite opes station name received by the radio NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Uconnect Hands Free Music Control These commands can be spoken when playing music from your SD card USB device CD or iPod after pushing the Uconnect voice command button 1R an the steering wheel Ragtime Favorites vopiin Tunes Auto Podcast Radio wil play Radio will play Radio wil play the Radio wil play Radio will play the ecle wal Play Me Radiowil play the Artist Scott Song Maple Leaf the Playlist Party Podcast Weekly sg Rag Jekyll and Mr track 8 030563046 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 NOTE 3 Playlist Podcast and audio book commands are only 1 You can replace the album artist song genre playlist arenlable when teod Xoronnesednandr ld yat podcast and audio book names with any correspond 4 VR commands Albums Artists and Genre names are ing names on the current device that is playing based on the music database provided by Gracenote 2 You can replace 8 with any track on the CD that is NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold currently playing Command is only available when face and shaded grey CD is playing 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Uco
63. ary objects in a curve This may also occur at the base of steep hills This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 Using ACC On Hills When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor mance may be limited 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lane Changing ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary 818e9563 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There will not be suffi cient distance to the vehicle ahead ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 818e9567 Stationary Objects And Vehicles General Information ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your
64. be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Reclining The Seatback WARNING Continued The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward shoulder belt is no longer resting against your the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release chest In a collision you could slide under the seat the switch when the desired position is reached belt which could result in serious injury or death EC WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Lumbar If Equipped Continued Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be
65. because they take your eyes from the road or your attention from driving Never dial using the mobile phone keypad while driving You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice a command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute ON OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M without terminating the call To transfer
66. before raising the changing the right front tire block vehicle the left rear wheel e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to 060505162 be raised NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic when the vehicle is being jacked transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued 504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE WARNING Continued CAUTION Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic 5 a9 69 7 Jack Warning Label Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 060641852 Jacking Locations en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 505 1 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench 2 If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle 3 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrenc
67. can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status touch and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for sys tem function and operating information e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside sideview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE VERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Blind Spot Alert When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot M
68. charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 590 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center e Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Custome
69. check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Key Fob with Remote x2 Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Trunk closed e HAZARD switch off e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 e e Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE PANIC button not pressed System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle theft alarm not active Ignition in OFF position WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in jury or death when inhaled Keep Remote
70. damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may i
71. directions of the child restraint manu 3 facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 1 If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat 5 Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more 6 easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions 88 THINGS TO KN
72. directly 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone Roadside Assistance If you need roadside assistance e Press the w button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Roadside Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Roadside Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Roadside Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that ma
73. e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine OFF When the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 WARNING Continued Children should be warned not to touch the park ing brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could oper
74. e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The VR button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the Sve button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length Touch the More hard key then touch the Settings soft key Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempt ing to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength and phone battery strength ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad WARNING Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort and convenience of you and your passengers Some of these should not
75. ee ee e Steering Wheel Audio Controls 614 INDEX eas Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 368 SLOFaBEe 4s sexui Wad ba ace ree ec A ok Re dre is 570 Storage Vehicle siege db eR Eb es 381 storing Your Vehicle as eee ale ae 570 Stuck Ereeing iia sae x dehet Ret hea a as 513 Sunglasses Storage sess ese e ems 281 SUNROOF iis etic S05 G08 Rv RUP Ue e pg dus 291 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 59 Synthetic Engine Qil sea seres er aa samane iia 533 System Remote Starting 000 26 Tachometer 2 0 sse e e e nee ia 314 Telescoping Steering Column 234 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 379 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 322 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tilt Steering Column os es be e a e va 234 Time Delay Headlight 0 222 Tire and Loading Information Placard 442 Tire Markings i oes darse RR e m d 436 ju ETT 100 Aging Life of Tires sma stirea aa ae iaa 455 Aif Pressure a osicesruekes e besna aa Cede dod 447 Gh ains Suus Maelo pew eet ord 457 Changing 4 924 930 e LAG ES Ue Rh od 499 Compact Spare cee esl 452 General Information 00 447 High Speed ict oes eee ae Le e eg rs 450 Inflation Pressures 2 tussia eee 448 Jacking iussa teas Se Ck cee dr d 499 Lite f Tires sccrsezek Seba nm ee ed 455 Loa
76. fluid if using your ve X X X H hicle for any of the following police taxi E fleet off road or frequent trailer towing D Inspect and replace PCV valve if neces X hs sary E The spark plug change interval is mileage based only 8 yearly intervals do not apply 506 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N ie E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech YOUR VEHICLE 4 o9 8 Sieh a eae Sale a 2 aoe x 589 Impaired TDD TTY 000 591 Prepare For The Appointment 589 Service Contract esses resesi onre neroa 591 Prepare A List sse cope RR 589 HR WARRANTY INFORMATION 592 Be Reasonable With Requests 589 B MOPAR PARTS enn 593 B IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 589 Bi REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 593 Chrysler Group LLC Customer
77. in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key This light only shows that the parking brake is ap fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle plied It does not show the degree of brake application e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking bra
78. is in the ON RUN position A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal 13 Air Bag Warning Light operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others e This light will turn on for four to eight seconds ry as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 14 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light es If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
79. it 4 Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel displays OFF could enter the catalytic converter and once the Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail Continued able from your authorized dealer is recommended 3904 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE WARNING Continued e If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel 1 Press and hold the brake pedal 2 Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it 3 Press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake
80. lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be 47 C ER Part 15 attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary 47 C F R Part 15 515 FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems Classification Specifications 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis ing at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir ing the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h To change modes press the MODE button when the system is in either the OFF READY or SET position While pressing the mode button a chime alerts the driver to the change of state from Adaptive Cruise Control to normal Cruise Control Cruise Ready will be displayed if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position Cruise Off will be displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position To switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode press the MODE button a second time WARNING In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to vehicle distan
81. lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR
82. located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map e Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Audio e Equalizer Touch the Equalizer soft key to change this display When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting e Balance Fade Touch the Balance Fade soft key to change t
83. minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value 462 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is
84. motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety 594 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features
85. not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury 510 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For Jump Start The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the engine compartment for jump starting NOTE The remote battery posts are viewed by standing on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender 2 060836876 Remote Battery Posts 1 Remote Positive 4 Post 2 Remote Negative Post EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 511 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow v
86. not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the Automatic Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display When the Uconnect system is in different modes Radio Player Settings More etc the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display General Overview Hard Keys Hard keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect 4 3 screen in the center of the instrument panel There are also hard keys located below the Uconnect touch screen UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371 044336084 045672363 Uconnect 4 3 Hard key Automatic Climate Controls Hard keys ATC System Shown 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Soft Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect system screen Front Rear Uconnect 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Soft Keys 045669087 Uconnect 4 3 Manual Temperature Controls Soft keys E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373 Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 MAX AIC Button Pr
87. not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light ee STARTING AND OPERATING 463 e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
88. on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the
89. on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility Courtesy Lights The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top corner of the lens To turn the lights off press the lens a second time 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights 031464435 Courtesy Lights Sunglasses Bin Door At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281 033333448 Sunglasses Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee The HomeLink buttons located on either the overhead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 034033576
90. or return to its original color as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a different color An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 469 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the co
91. over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision Continued 306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements ste The rear window defroster button is located on e Use care when washing the inside of the rear the climate control Press this button to turn on the window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the when the rear window defroster is on The rear window heating elements Labels can be peeled off after defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 soaking with warm water minutes For an additional five minutes of operation Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive press the button a second time window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicl
92. position To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mM NOTE The SmartBeam system can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights t
93. refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call touch the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Only one call can be placed on hold at a time You can also press the button to toggle between the active and held phone call Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the but ton or the end soft key Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key or press the and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
94. see the chosen device move to the top of the list Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phon
95. select Favorites on the left side of the screen and then touch the Options soft key e Touch the next to the Favorite you would like to remove 68 4 FM 91 7 E 10 10 NW 54 out Phonebook Options E s Milo F Voicemail Remove from Favs Favorites E Buddy s Pizza a F Mom s Cell Emergency 5 items in list c c d F Radio po NS Player Controls Climate Phone More The Options pop up will display touch Remove from Favs ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Emergency And Towing Assistance The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only be altered These cannot be deleted and the names cannot be changed To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these steps Touch the Phonebook soft key from the Phone main Screen Touch the Favorites soft key Next scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Favorites e Touch the Options soft key Touch the next to appropriate Favorite that is to be altered udi FM 95 5 Phonebook gt Edit Number Reset to Default Dad Keith Melissa Emergency 7 toms in fist Sy EY Player Controis OFF Climate The Options pop up will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting the number to default Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available and supported by B
96. smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system 2 could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add afte
97. stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Reset Auto Up e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window closure it will reverse direction and then go back probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up down Remove the obstacle and use the window i Pull the window switch up to close the window switch again to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger additional two seconds after the window is closed the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds WARNING after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch There is no anti pinch protec
98. stopping distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you POWER STEERING Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electro hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist then the system will provide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool If the SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM e message and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further informatio
99. sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Continued 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i
100. the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 Lights Fluid Leaks Have someone observe the oper
101. the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine OFF When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Continued WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi tion to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this
102. the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued 402 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing
103. the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator s
104. the hood is fully latched before driving your close it Lower the hood until it is open 8 in 20 cm vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open approximately and then drop it This should secure when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the Failure to follow this warning could result in serious hood is fully closed with both latches engaged injury or death 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS Headlight Switch TE The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instru ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte rior lights and fog lights 031463855 Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light op eration ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF
105. the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC Ii 13D481 126 AC 3rd Edition Printed in U S A
106. this display When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Engine Off Power Delay Touch the Engine Off Power Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key Compass Settings e Variance Touch the Variance soft key to change this display Com pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differ ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the dif ferences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is
107. this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range Pair Additional Mobile Phones e Touch the Settings soft key from the Phone main screen e Next touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take pre cedence over other paired phones within range 68 4 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Bluetooth Pairing Bluetooth pairing successful Motorola 5149 Make this phone your favorite d L Radio lt 3 pr Climate Playor Controis More Phone NOTE For phones which are not made a favorite the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest phone paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio e Show Paired Phones or e Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device e
108. to Panel 7 and turn on AVC If it s cloudy or 1 dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature X ji E rd control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Mix s or Defrost Sg HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and de 4 e Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear ut ie 566 COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor If its sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 7 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Mix or Defrost iod as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort iiai Information Provided by DEALER STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS B STARTING PROCEDURES 55 45 Ree 390 B AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 395 Automatic Transmission 390 Key Ignition Park Interlock 397 Keyless Enter N Go 00 391 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 397 Normal Starting cee a Eros 391 Eight Speed Automatic Transmission EN Extreme Cold Weather If Equipped iue RR rate tes 397 Below 20 F Or 229 C ssssssss 393 Five Speed Automatic Transmission If Engine Fails To Start 05 393 es a ae ea as D After Starting 6 0 0 6 0 cece ees 394 r ek wenqufus quie natutut
109. to shift the transmission out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Sys tem in this section To shift past multiple gear ranges at once such as PARK to DRIVE move the lever past the first or second detent Select the DRIVE range for normal driving The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is re leased and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears Standard Shifter The standard shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and LOW shift positions Using the LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 Optional Shifter With AutoStick The optional shift lever with AutoStick shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel provides PARK RE VERSE NEUTRAL DRIVE and SPORT shift positions Once in the DRIVE range tapping the shift lever rear ward will toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE mode You do not need to press the shift lever button when toggling between DRIVE and SPORT modes Manual shifts can be made using the AutoS
110. trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition The window controls on the driver s door control all the is in the ACC or ON RUN position door windows Power Windows NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation 021935320 Power Window Switches ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not let children play with power windows Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death AUTO Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTO down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To
111. turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Dimmer Controls The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 031463856 031463857 Dimmer Controls Instrument Panel Dimmer With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the left Dome Light Position dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders if equipped Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the park ing lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The mult
112. unintention ally firmly apply the parking brake 1 Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual Park Release lever 061541305 Console Storage Bin Using a small screwdriver or similar tool fish the tether strap up through the opening in the console base Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the lever and disengage the spring steel lever locking tab by pushing it to the right 061541306 Locking Tab While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 517 Tether Strap 518 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME To Reset The Manual Park Release 3 Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the 1 Push the latch at the base of the lever on the rear side lever is locked in its stowed position rearward away from the lever to unlatch the lever 4 Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console 2 Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and Reinstall the console storage bin down to its original position until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 519 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE NOTE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled v
113. use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal 548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few mil
114. using the DOWN button Press ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display Pressing any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the menu back Uconnect SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features Hard Keys Hard Keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect 4 3 screen In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME i e 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect touch screen Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 4 3 Settings In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Heated Seats Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup through hard keys and soft keys NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time Press the Settings hard key to access the Settings screen use the Page Up Down soft keys to scroll through the following settings Touch the desired se
115. vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire 456 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel ma
116. vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel 294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active fo
117. ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles ee STARTING AND OPERATING 475 81ae46ab E 85 Fuel Cap E 85 Badge CAUTION Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 476 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements
118. wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 593 MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about
119. 0 2l 74 Child Safety Locks zu 40 e Rm e ne 33 Clean Air Gasoline llle 471 Cleaning Wheels ac bbs mat ace PROS nde RR doe 557 Climate Control 0 0 0 0 02000 370 C in Holders aesae kea ou Rr RORIS des 302 Cold Weather Operation lesen 393 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 369 Compact Spare Tire a gias aeaiia a a Deea a 452 Computer Trip Travel osia era cerir issa serit 335 Connector UCI saris eon dat Sele ha ea Gee wed nds 366 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 366 Conserving Fuel Jes siu wane pated eta 334 Console Floor ii iras e Rs 302 Contract Service u s a sw Ra a we ae ANG 591 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 547 Cooling System esce te oes Kem ets 544 Adding Coolant Antifreeze sss 546 en INDEX 601 Coolant Capacity o isese hems aem a hea ia 576 Coolant Level 4i entri d RE RUE Us 544 Disposal of Used Coolant 547 Drain Flush and Refill 545 Inspection 3e e de eme dm HERA Se 548 Points to Remember lisse 548 Pressure Cap 3 9d hse gp Ree T RAO 547 Radiator Cap i e ke b kx 547 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 545 Corrosion Protection 0 0 000000 ea ee 555 Cruise Control Speed Control 244 Cupholders 4 saevire RO uke gn eees 299 Customer Assistance 6 0 ee ee eee 589 Data Recorder Event 0 000 cece eae 73 Daytime Brightnes
120. 0 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate 030405535 Rear Monitoring Overtaking Approaching UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in berms etc However occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Stationary Objects Overtaking Passing 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death esos Rear Cross Path Opposing Traffic The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected a
121. 21 Brake Assist Warning 05 435 Brake Warning 6 6 6 6 eee eee 320 Bulb Replacement 0 0000 572 Daytime Running 0 00 eee eee 223 Dimmer Switch Headlight 226 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 435 EXIeUOE akrega spies Ses cas aig E eat BERE ar Bes 101 Fog se e eee PE ete n a e Saad ase 224 Hazard Warning Flasher 0 498 Headlights 22 22 22 e RR re 220 Headlights On Reminder 223 Headlights On With Wipers 221 Headlight Switch 5 ss enar Rer ans 220 High Beam 206045000 pase acid RE 226 High Beam Indicator 00 0 314 High Beam Low Beam Select 226 Illuminated Entry 00 02 0000 20 Instrument Cluster 0 00 00 220 Intensity Control 0 6 eee eee 228 l teflO Ae 6 36 RR ora Wales eres 228 lic nse u 22ikaee exe AE a Ue GE RE 574 Lights On Reminder llle 223 Low Fuel i22 d Kalbe Gn RR SEU eee Dao 329 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 317 Map Reading 4 nue aces RC RP Ss Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 608 INDEX ee PASSING ecese date asie emi we ee Reo e x 226 Reading iud hane rap ated Roa Parad a 226 Seat Belt Reminder less 322 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 319 DEIVICE dogs Es ieee e mb at See dr qos 570 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 317 bmartBeams see we d Ga eee RA 221 Th
122. 483 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 483 GVWR 2s oue e PERO eee ag gas 483 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water lille 420 Hazard Warning Flasher 04 498 Headlights 9 cator Re e e Rees 573 Automatic i t dre REPE RE ew 221 Cleaning 3434x443 ed ee ER ARE RR s 559 Delay co tw de ee ede wed SEE RS ons 222 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 226 Lights On Reminder 205 223 On With Wipers 4 22554 ei presia mistag en 221 PASSING nucon mee Ee chr der eqq x 226 Switch 45 436 chia ea SUR EROR UR Stee RUN 220 Time Delay ii RR Rege 222 Washers dp enaga exe bk a eee Rares 541 Headlight Washers Ses ccc l l 541 Head Restraints e he a RS 209 Head R stS eoo esaea a a eee 209 Heated Mirrors 0 00 eee eee 114 Heated Seats llle 202 Heater Engine Block 00000200 395 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 226 Hill Start Assist 606 INDEX MM Hitches Trailer Towing aee Ree CRUS dnd 487 Holder Colni 2534 3 end RPG d was 302 Ignition Keys xw sodes ud e dnte ttu une eae 12 Illuminated Entry 3 22k bre hes 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key 0 06 15 Infant Restraint 2er dls cae ea eein Cape 74 Information Center Vehicle 0 05 324 Inside Rearview Mirror 00 0005 110 Instrument Cluster esee 314 Instrument Panel and Controls 311 Instr
123. 5 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button Cancel Remote Start Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm Any engine warning lights come on Low Fuel Light turns on The hood is opened The hazard switch is pressed The shift lever is moved out of PARK The brake pedal is pressed 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock the front doors
124. 6 m Fuse Spare 45 15 Amp Cluster Rearview 37 15 Amp Radio Blue Mirror Compass Blue 46 10 Amp Adaptive Cruise Con Red trol ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569 Cav pou Mini A Cav bo Mini NT tridge Description tridge Description ity Fuse ity Fuse Fuse Fuse 47 10 Amp Adaptive Front Light 55 Fuse Spare Red ing 56 Fuse Spare 48 20 Amp Active Suspension 57 Fuse Spare Liu 58 10 Amp Airbag Module 49 Fuse Spare Red 50 Fuse Spare 59 Fuse Spare 51 20 Amp Front Heated Seats 60 Fuse Spare Yellow UA cmn holders 61 Fuse Spare En mp eated Cupholders 62 Fuse 5 Red Rear Heated Seat ad po Givitches 63 Fuse Spare 53 10 Amp HVAC Module In Car 9 lli mic Reat naa Red Temperature Sensor Wakuta 54 Fuse Spare 570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Car p tridge pad Description Fuse 65 10 Amp Airbag Module Red 66 m Fuse Spare 67 15 Amp Run Sense Blue 68 15 Amp Illumination Rear Sun Blue shade 69 m Fuse Spare 70 m Fuse Spare VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negati
125. 89mi BRAKE 102 032363711 Brake Alert 2 NE 156789mi BRAKE 102 XE 032363712 Brake Alert 1 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ACC or Cruise is highlighted in the EVIC Status of the ACC or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line Press and release the SELECT right arrow button to display the following information Adaptive Cruise Control Off e When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready e When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready ACC SET e When ACC is set the set speed will display The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC activity occurs which may include any of the following e Set Speed Change Distance Setting Change e System Cancel e Driver Override System Off e ACC Proximity Warning e ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected a
126. 90 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 291 Opening Sunroof Express 292 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 292 Closing Sunroof Express 292 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 292 Pinch Protect Features scce ss sina camas s da 292 Venting Sunroof Express 293 Sunshade Operation 00 293 Wind Buffeting 0 0 0 0 eae 293 Sunroof Maintenance 00 293 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Ignition Off Operation smets sa 294 Console Features llle 302 Sunroof Fully Closed 0000 294 Door Storages e e eege alae eee 304 E ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS 294 Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped with 60 40 B CUPHOLDERS sss 299 Split Folding Rear eat resected tessi es 304 Front Seat Cupholders 299 SEA VINDOWBBSEUNES pias easy nie ee 906 2 Rear Seat Cupholders sss 301 Rear Window Defroster 306 B STORAGE 2 eee 302 M LOAD EY ERING GXOTEM TOURER io Glovebox Stor ges es eii tacis diresensi d 302 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a countercl
127. AB during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed instrument panel e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even Continued on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in th
128. ACC IBATEVZEU EST P R N D S 032363725 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Unavailable Warning 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a trailer hitch or if the ACC performance does not return to normal after removing the trailer hitch see your authorized dealer Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly 81869557 Turns And Bends In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves 818e955e ACC may occasionally provide braking and or a driver alert that you consider unnecessary This may be the system s response to signs guardrails and other station
129. ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will Restraints in this Vehicle make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint s belt path Please see the table below and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts 022668888 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a for ward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restr
130. ARTING AND OPERATING BENE Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW a
131. ARTING AND OPERATING ME STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if in a location accessible to children and do not present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N belts Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could WARNINGI operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a before shifting into any driving gear number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Automatic Transmission Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 CAUTION Keyless Enter N Go Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push
132. AUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and Fuel Filler Door Release Switch may affect driveability 2 Open the fuel filler door STARTING AND OPERATING 479 4 Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel ing NOTE Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open 5 Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 6 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door ram 056810781 Fuel Filler Door 3 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system 480 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE A funnel is provided located in the trunk in the CAUTION spare tire area to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on A fire may result if gasolin
133. Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Continued 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the WARNING Continued Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and or Seat Mounted Side Air Bag S
134. Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and
135. Auto Unlock On Exit soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Flash Lights With Lock Touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sound Horn With Remote Start Touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sound Horn With Lock Touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the horn will chirp when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Remote Door Unlock Order Touch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft key to change this display When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When U
136. Center 590 In The 50 United States And Washington D C 0 66 593 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 590 In Mexico contact ssa ekle fy ems 591 EU aCe a a Ru dmt ll PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 588 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades sae ti are oea a 00000 596 TIRE QUALITY GRADES 595 TOA W CAT aem baee a rE amp ad 595 Temperature Grades 000000 596 E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 589 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealer you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily
137. D OPERATING 465 Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the LOW TIRE message will turn off and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped ram The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire p
138. FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert opera F tion when the system is detecting an obstacle Omi Park Assist MEL 032763987 Continuous Tone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 59 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 59 in 150 cm 150 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow Continuous Flashing Flashing Flashing Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the Uconnect System The available choices are Off Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the ParkSense soft key is pressed to disable the system the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYS TEM OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE at or below 7 mph 11 km h Service The Park
139. FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 it For example you can use the compound command form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you For certain operations compound commands can be Natural Speech used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine mobile Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up p
140. G YOUR VEHICLE 555 Change Axle Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants 556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Washing e e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar
141. General Information in Starting and Oper ating for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for informa tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for information on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace ment procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits 492 STARTING AND OPERATING M Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 493 CAUTION WARNING Continued If the trailer weighs more than
142. ICLE M WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fi
143. In order to ensure proper operation the Elec You could lose control and have an accident Always tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut leave the system OFF when you are not using it down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire if equipped To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pr
144. L Button 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft 1 5 m of the deck lid To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handles press the door handle LOCK button to lock both doors Do NOT grab the door handle when pressing the door handle lock button This could unlock the door s Press The Door Handle Button To Lock 020273030 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This 2 is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking e The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel Do NOT Grab The handle When Locking 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door
145. M Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the high est priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you would need to choose a particular Phone or Audio Device follow these steps Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch to select the particular Phone or the Phone Audio soft key and then an Audio Device At the Options pop up screen touch the Connect Device soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Select the Phone or Audio Device e At the Options pop up screen touch the Disconnect Device soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Select the Phone or Audio Device At the Options pop up screen touch the Delete De vice soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite e e e e e Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the currently connected device At the Options pop up screen touch the Make Favor ite soft key you will
146. MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation 478 STARTING AND OPERATING Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located in the designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure driver s door map pocket that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts C
147. Modifications Vehicle 7 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 00 545 Disposal estius Ee ho Foes wha ee Meenas rd 547 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 0 426 Anti Lock Warning Light llle 319 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Appearance Care a sna ded nee e Sed Ga 555 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Assist Hill Start 2l 432 Auto Down Power Windows less 41 Automatic Dimming Mirror lille 110 Automatic Door Locks s s 0 0 2 0 000 eee 32 ee INDEX 599 Automatic Headlights llle 221 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 332 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 379 Automatic Transmission lees 397 Adding Fluid eR I Rm 553 Axutos ck gabe dawesm Sue Ede ERE 413 Fluid and Filter Changes llus 553 Fluid Change 2 e ee ieee nea as 553 Fluid Level Check 00 00000 552 Fluid Type asa eee ee Rm Rae 552 Special Additives isses n 552 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 405 ANUtOSUCK 4 rara enra PERE dE Red 413 Auto Unlock Doors llle 33 Auto Up Power Windows lees A1 Axle Fluid ess 22x 285 2443 2400 OX RERO 578 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid Ls 578 Battery cei wach vae PORC UH E ae ae 535 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Location lt 4 34i 82008948 ae585 40 Pur ue eden 535 Belts Seat x cda ad
148. More UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 FM 95 5 70 ou Controls x Driver Passenger Heated Heated at Sea Seat Heated gt Screen es Wheel i mi OFF ii a J Ore T Radio Player Controls Climate a Phone More Heated Steering Wheel Soft Key NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator WARNING and clutch pedals if equipped to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin steering wheel because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat tion or other physical conditions must exercise cushion side shield care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used f
149. NG YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly Bulb Number Backup Lamp 3157 Center High Mount Stop LED Serviced at Autho Lamp CHMSL rized Dealer CAUTION License 168 Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil BULB REPLACEMENT contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the 1 ith Front Low Beam Headlamp High Beam diee Node pia dp amu a the Headlamp Park Turn Lamp and Side Marker 8 Lamp Models with Halogen Headlamps 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and 1 Open the hood install the replacement bulb NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573 WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned Front Low Beam Headlamp and Park Turn Lamp Models with High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID HID Headlamps The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your
150. ONTROL Intermittent Wiper System 230 IF EQUIPPED sse ess 240 U aa ee ee ee ea To Activate ccce eee 241 Windshield Washers lesus 231 To Set A Desired Speed 242 Mist Feature osi iore des P Rea i ais 232 To Deactivate ke enc oa LLL LLL 242 Headlights On With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only sss 232 TS RESURIG a ion da saesant is Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 233 TO Naty SSP Pen CHUA ione at Seka eet ps E TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN 234 To Accelerate For Passing 243 E ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC m EL LE DBIIGISTEERING IF EQUIPPED 223 132 So EY ce oH ES 244 COLUMN IF EQUIPPED 235 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation 246 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC 247 To Ac uvale cesse Eee es 248 To Set A Desired ACC Speed 249 To Cancel cso ee R ae e Ree 250 To Turn Offs e gcse rikis einsi esini E 251 To Resume Speed 00 00005 251 To Vary The Speed Setting 252 Setting The Following Distance In ACC 253 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu 256 Display Warnings And Maintenance 258 Precautions While Driving With ACC 260 General Information 0 263
151. OW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 7 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seatbelt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
152. PED This mode alters the transmission s automatic shift schedule for sportier driving Upshift speeds are in creased to make full use of available engine power To toggle between DRIVE and SPORT modes touch the SPORT button on the Controls screen in the center touch panel Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped the transmission will remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will con tinue to operate Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the engine OFF 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 413 NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible conven
153. Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 15 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 16 Temperature Control Manual Temperature Control Only Press the temperature soft key to regulate the tempera ture of the air inside the passenger compartment Moving the temperature bar into the red area indicates warmer temperatures Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings Also make sure to select only Panel Bi Level or Floor modes 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE For Manual Climate Controls if the system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off
154. RAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle 514 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE NOTE Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans mission shifting occurring WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 5 SPEED TRANSMISSION If a malfunction occurs and th
155. RNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued 500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Continued Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack 1 Open the trunk 2 Lift the access cover using the pull strap WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501 T Opening The Access Panel Spare Tire Fastener 3 Remove the fa
156. RSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 Miles Per Gallon MPG The Miles Per Gallon MPG feature displays instanta neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE this function cannot be reset Press the BACK button to return to the main menu Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the SELECT button to display the current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Trip Info Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON RUN position 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds The current display will reset along with other functions Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units disp
157. Radiator Fan 1 Yellow Module If Green Equipped 3 50 Amp Power Steering 1 10 EE 10 Amp Security Red Red 4 30 Amp Starter 11 20 Amp Horns Pink Yellow 5 40 Amp Anti Lock Brakes 12 10 Amp Air Conditioning Green Red Clutch 6 25 Amp Anti Lock Brakes 13 Fuse Spare Natural 14 E 2m Fuse Spare Z Fuse Spare 15 25 Amp Transmission 8 Fuse Spare Natural 16 Fuse Spare ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 18 50 Amp Radiator Fan 2 29 15 Amp Transmission Red Blue Shifter 19 50 Amp Power Steering 2 30 Fuse Spare Red 31 25 Amp Engine Module 20 30 Amp Wiper Motor Natural Pink 32 Fuse Spare 21 30 Amp Headlamp Washers 33 Fuse Spare 34 35Amp Powertrain 1 22 Fuse Spare Natural 23 B Fuse Spare 35 20 Amp Powertrain 2 24 EE Fuse Spare Yellow 28 25 Amp Fuel Pump 36 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Natural Red Module 564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 37 10 Amp Engine Controller 49 Fuse Spare Red Rad Fan Relays 50 Fuse Spare 38 10 Amp Airbag Module 51 20 Amp Vacu
158. Range Select ERS feature is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 8 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to main
159. Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to in crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to de crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h NOTE e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle su
160. Sense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system is mal functioning the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME SERVICE PARK ASSIST or the SERVICE PARK AS SIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condition the EVIC PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If CLEAN PARK ASSIST appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruc tion and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer It SERVICE PARK ASSIST or SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see an authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debr
161. Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Using The Panic
162. Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to t
163. TC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occurs recirculation will be unavailable 382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instruc tions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383 Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS s7 and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle Ww set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows CX Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level EE with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control
164. TURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau tion note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle the static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate dis tances for each zone Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your
165. The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence comp
166. To DRIVE Bring the vehicle to a complete stop firmly press the brake pedal press the lock button on the shift lever then pull the shift lever rearward and release when D is displayed in the EVIC To shift back into REVERSE from DRIVE bring the vehicle to a complete stop firmly press the brake pedal press the lock button on the shift lever then push the shift lever forward and release when R is displayed in the EVIC Shifting From DRIVE To SPORTILOW Vehicles Equipped With SPORT Mode To shift from DRIVE to SPORT pull the shift lever rearward until S is displayed in the EVIC To shift back into DRIVE from SPORT pull the shift lever rearward until D is displayed in the EVIC Vehicles Equipped With LOW Mode To shift from DRIVE to LOW pull the shift lever rear ward until L is displayed in the EVIC To shift back into DRIVE from LOW pull the shift lever rearward until D is displayed in the EVIC Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range E STARTING AND OPERATING 401 If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the ignition to the LOCK OFF position before restarting Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK OFF position first NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when
167. Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561 FUSES CAUTION Integrated Power Module e When installing the integrated power module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly compartment This module contains fuses and relays positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the integrated power mod ule and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected bay 072710829 Integrated Power Module 562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 1 Fuse Spare 9 20 Amp All Wheel Drive 2 40 Amp
168. Touch the Player or Media soft key to begin e Change the Source to Bluetooth e Touch the Bluetooth soft key to display the Paired Audio Devices screen e Touch the Add Device soft key 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If there is no device currently connected with the system a pop up will appear e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled audio device When prompted on the device enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE For devices which are not made a favorite the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the high est priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you would need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device follow these steps Touch the Settings soft key
169. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 Head Restraints Active Head Restraints Front Seats Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with by restricting head movement in the event of a rear Active Head Restraints AHR In the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR mmm USELESS The AHRs will automatically return to their normal The head restraints for all occupants must be prop Position following a rear impact If the AHRs do not erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu return to their normal position see your authorized pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad dealer immediately justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint em 030907490 Push Button NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians for service p
170. Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone Roadside Assistance If you need roadside assistance e Press the w button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Roadside Assistance NOTE e The roadside assistance call may also be initiated by touch The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Roadside Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Roadside Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling
171. Your Vehicle EVIC Amber Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Forward Collision Warning FCW OFF FCW his telltale informs the driver that the For OFF ward Collision Warning feature is Off The telltale is On when the front radar sensor is blocked and requires cleaning the ACC FCW sensors require service or the ACC FCW system is unavailable because of a system error For further infor mation refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Low Fuel Telltale When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator 4 e s This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind shield washer fluid is low e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Malfunction This light will turn on when a ACC is not Ke operating and needs service For further infor mation refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 e SERV AWD Service All Wheel Drive Indicator SERV This light will turn on when the All Wheel Awp Prive feature requires service For further in formation refer to All Wheel Drive in Start ing And Operating EVIC Red Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include
172. a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Press the button to accept the call To ignore the call touch the Ignore soft key on the touch screen You can also touch the answer soft key or touch the caller ID box Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the phone button answer soft key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the Eve button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call
173. a or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System We recommend 14 5 Quarts 13 9 Liters you use MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System We recommend you 15 Quarts 14 3 Liters use MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level mn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil 3 6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine 87 Octane Fuel
174. a wad dd wa ew ae AER Ee 49 Body Mechanism Lubrication 540 B Pillar Location ocd de Re Reed 442 Brake Assist System co ece 6 0 mists ie 429 Brake Control System Electronic 428 Brake Fluid seme eaea Ree RUE Ste ee a 578 Brake Parking 2 sos ee ens cue ceni 424 Brake System ces eem ee dear he eoe doe es 549 Anti Lock ABS 2 2 2 2 0 eee eee 426 Fluid Check iura Aa eas ae aad 550 Master Cylinder lille 550 Parkin cca ote gs aeons emen d 424 Warning Light 00000 320 Brake Transmission Interlock 0 0 397 Brightness Interior Lights 228 Bulb Replacement 600 INDEX M Bulbs Light eon RR em kem Rhe 101 Camera Reat 224525445493 640865894400 277 Capacities Fltid ss cecs pae Cn a 576 Caps Filler OIL Engine sares as dca ginra t RR RUE we ds 533 Radiator Coolant Pressure 547 Carbon Monoxide Warning 6 97 Cargo Vehicle Loading 004 482 Car Washes ressasser ec ees 556 Cellular Phone 0 0 0 0 cece eee eens 370 Certification Label 2 0 0 0 0 0 00 eee 482 Chains Tire 2229 audra ue eq due EO 457 Changing A Flat Tire cicca llle 499 Chart lire Sizifig i sisse e RR enr Rea 438 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 317 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 97 Checks Safety iie ces mum Rete Rn 97 Child Restraint 0 0 0
175. ablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 508 INDEX eee About Your Brakes 0 0 eee eee 424 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 426 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 244 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 546 Adding Fuel sires eves ob400e0 2 o5 4056 dd 478 Adding Washer Fluid llle 541 Additives Fuel ergai itie eee eee ee 473 Adjustable Pedals 1 2 llle 238 Airbag su cag ces eS ees x ae ea a A 59 Airbag Deployment 0 0 000000000 70 Airbag Light ee RR Rer EORR 66 Airbag Maintenance l l evags 7 Airbag Side sexe gu aces mes Ce eret cred 62 Airbag Window Side Curtain 63 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 534 Air Conditioner Maintenance 537 Air Conditioning Filter llle 382 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 383 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 537 Air Conditioning System e ss ieas d aceia ie aes 379 Air Pressure Tires 0 0 0 ce ee 448 Alarm Light cererii RES ERE ELE 319 Alarm Pame ress arran i eR eod En Ea 23 Alarm Security Alarm llle ess 18 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 All Wheel Drive AWD lessen 418 Alterations
176. ace gua 301 Rear Park Sense System llle 268 Rear Seat Folding cer seen cerita ene 211 Rear Window Defroster llle 306 Rear Window Features llle 306 Recorder Event Data ose e nuras 0 0 00 eee eae 73 Recreational Towing 00 0000s 496 Reformulated Gasoline 2004 471 Refrigerant 3 i25 mca i temas ERR EE ER 537 Reminder Lights On s ien getest neoa tendai 223 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 00 00 eee eee 57 Remote Control Starting System caua ke gd Seale Rear E s a 26 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 368 Remote Starting System 6 0 eee eee 26 Remote Trunk Release 0000004 43 Replacement Bulbs 00000 570 Replacement Keys 0 6 0 0 cee eee eae 16 Replacement Parts 0000000 529 Replacement Tires 2 6 0 0 sessrisra seri 456 Reporting Safety Defects 00 0 593 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 315 Restraint Head s 4300 sat de REG eR Y d 209 Restraints Child 2 0 0 00 cee eae 74 Restraints Occupant 6 6 6 eee ees 45 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 0 513 Rotation Tires sys gos eka xh ee ee 459 6012 INDEX ae Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 98 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 100 Safety Defects Reporting llle 593 Safety Exhaust Gas llle ees
177. aching Strap B Tether Anchor 4 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 5 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenan
178. ack and seat cushion 7 LATCH Anchorages Locating The LATCH Anchorages 4 In addition there are tether strap anchorages 3 behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE window These tether strap anchorages are under a anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a e tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position do not use that outboard position If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt do not install a child seat in that outboard position WARNING Tether Strap Anchorages LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side than one child restraint Please refer to Installing Each will have a hook or connector to attach to thelower The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the typical installation instructions Always follow the
179. addle until D or S is once again displayed in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury Operation Five Speed Transmission When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply tap the shift lever to the right or left while in the DRIVE position or tap one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles if equipped Tapping to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear while using to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear When AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up or down when is manually selected by the driver using the shift lever or the shift paddles if equipped unless an engine lugging or overspeed con dition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen except as described below If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode the transmission will automatically shift up w
180. ae 591 en INDEX 613 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator sese 317 Service Manuals 0 0 00 eee 594 Sl fting e em Signe Sale eed ein ee Banya eater eS 395 Automatic Transmission Lr 395 Shift Lever Override 0 0 0 000s 514 Shoulder Belts 52 143 Rur ti tea nae ee esposa 49 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 53 Side Ambag eee m p Re ERE VE 68 Side View Mirror Adjustment 111 Signals THER o aya n Rep ER E en ee 101 SmartBeams llle 221 Snow Chains Tire Chains 457 Show Tires a3 3 ssh oma ach dex ka Sce es 451 Sound System Kick r erp iR a soa xa acea b EE 366 Spare Tiss cox xcci doe Rotae e ad ers dod 452 Spark Plugs zi eene s x ene s 577 Specifications Fuel Gasoline eee eee 577 Oil 2420 tet E eae E eee es Oe 577 Speed Control Cruise Control 240 Speedometet ches signee ct RR I wh epee ee 318 Starting cas Pawan gadis Rand hte Re oa es A 26 Automatic Transmission 390 Cold Weather lees 393 Engine Fails to Start 2 00000 393 R MOte 32 445 ffi dow Pago ee eee RES 26 Starting and Operating 0 390 Starting Procedures 00000000000 390 Steering Column Lock 0 0 0 0 ee eee POWOEP ecaa eck pu eee GE Ee Dens ea Ea Tilt Colum i iaa secedere i Wheel Heated llle Wheel Tilt uu Rune Cerea es
181. age Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door open
182. aging button will be greyed out and the feature will not be available for use EJ 12 Beatrice Adams Listen fe 11 Sanjiv Prabaker Listen f 10 Lin Ford Listen E 9 Jay Kay Listen 7 items in fst NOTE Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when 2 w Sea os Radio Player Controls Clirnate Phone More the vehicle is not in moving N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Read Messages Once a message is received and viewed or listened to If you receive a new text message while your phone is yoa wat ave mie forewing Opeone connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement willbe e Send a Reply made to notify you that you have a new text message a Torward t FM 95 5 70 out e Call lll be there soon Me lt Reply Forward Inbox bed FTN OFF RW Nav Radio Player Controis Climate More 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Send Messages Using Soft Keys FM 95 5 Messagi gt You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send sami a new message inbox 1 Yes 4 L4 New 2 Am M e Touch the Phone soft key EMEN kay Touch the messaging soft key then New Message HLan Etak nal now 5 Call me e Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person NOE oa v you wish to send the message to 18 toms in st 1 E OFF r e If multiple numbers are available for the contact select J adio Player Controls Clirnate More which number you would like to have the
183. aint No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages N A 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Can two child restraints be at tached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor ages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen ger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child re straint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be re moved Yes center position only THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap between the seatb
184. aint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is al lowed if the child restraint manu facturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Yes center position only Yes In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat Tolock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract N oo THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking soun
185. aking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 SPORT MODE 5 7L ONLY IF EQUIPPED e Automatic Auto Mode This is the default position when vehicle ignition is first turned on This mode will give a sporty but comfortable ride Within this mode the suspension will adapt to the vehicle inputs includ ing vehicle speed steering inputs braking and accel eration This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled dampening system This system reduces body roll and pitch in many driving situations including cornering acceleration and braking There are three modes of op eration Sport Mode This mode is driver selectable when the vehicle is placed in SPORT mode press the CON TROLS button and then the SPORT button on the display screen This mode will set suspension for maximum performance handling and is intended for spirited driving NOTE The SPORT setting will provide a firmer ride e When SPORT mode is enabled a flag will light up in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Description in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information EM Moe 058364722 SPORT Mode 418 STARTING AND OPERATING ME AUTO mode will provide a sporty comfortable ride wh
186. al equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed STARTING AND OPERATING 455 Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style m Tire pressure Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced e Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and summer tires typically have a reduced 055007576 tread life Rotation of these tires per the
187. ange the current setting refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door 021835329 021530329 Child Protection Door Lock Function Child Protection Door Lock Location WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter
188. asoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543 CAUTION Continued e Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is impor tant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the t
189. atch Plate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 1 e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop erly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Z xe Continued NC 3 022641456 Continued Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause inter nal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a colli sion A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the should
190. ate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the engine can be turned off This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK This system also locks the shift lever in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Eight Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art fuel efficient eight speed transmission The electronic shift lever in this vehicle does not slide like a conventional shifter Instead the shift lever is spring loaded and moves forward and rearward always returning to the center position after each gear is selected The transmission gear PRND is displayed both on the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 398 STARTING AND OPERATING To select a gear range press the lock button on the shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward You must also press the brake pedal
191. ation of brake lights and Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or aS panel brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be Door Latches located and corrected immediately Check for positive closing latching and locking Information Provided by DEALER UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E MIRRORS I 110 Power Mirrors cies es 113 3 Inside Day Night Mirror 110 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 114 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 110 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 114 Outside Mirrors ss concedis oreet saiun 111 Slide On Rod And Extender Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Features Of Sun Visor 0 00 114 If Equipped exer RR e 112 Hi BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED 115 Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Rear Cross Path 000 0002 eae 120 Re a pe Pesta iis utu a CO Modes Of Operation 04 122 onn dan ML Light ERIR a E 123 Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped 112 LUconn ct9 43 caedes Reg N 123
192. atures Of Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Electronic Speed Control Buttons Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET set the system or cause it to go faster than you want NOTE
193. atus Off Near or Far will be displayed in the Uconnect display The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you NOTE e In the Off setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the Uconnect display The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over head objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away oncom ing traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e If the FCW becomes disabled then a warning will display on the EVIC screen 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW fu
194. be used when driving because they take your eyes from the road or your attention from driving Never dial using the mobile phone keypad while driving You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice a command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminatin
195. call Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Passive Entry Keyless Enter N Go Touch the Passive Entry soft key to change this display This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Heated Seats e Auto Heated Seats Touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key to change this display When temperatures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Engine Off Options e Easy Exit Seats If Equipped Touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key to change this display This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further infor mation e Headlight Off Delay Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft key to change
196. cations were met UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visbrcondire sveibead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch or with the ignition in the Accessory or Run position for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen 034141878 gers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Power Sunroof Switch 292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold
197. ce Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make
198. ce is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 To Vary The Speed Setting There are two ways to change the set speed Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the desired speed and press the SET button Tap the RES or SET button to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments respec tively Hold the RES or SET button for 5 mph 8 km h increments To Cancel The system will disable normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if You softly tap or depress the brake pedal You press the CANCEL button The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if You push and release the ON OFF button You turn off the ignition You switch off ESC If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the last driver setting ACC or N
199. ce of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045035190 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369 The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or d
200. check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob drive path structions or blind spots before backing up You are To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to must continue to pay attention while backing up stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 Turning ParkView On Or Off With Touch OVERHEAD CONSOLE mereen Radia The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights 1 Turn the Radio on and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door p Opener HomeLink and power sunroof switches may 2 icon the Moto OE also be included if equipped 3 Press the Settings soft key 4 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 5 Press the check box soft key next to Parkview Backup Camera to enable disable 033333450 Overhead Console 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Map Reading Lights To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn
201. cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect Sys tem Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status N Omi 10F Park Assist System OFF 032763982 Park Assist System Off The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing 032769130 three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous Park Assist Ready Park Assist j 032763983 Slow Tone UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 Park Assist 032763984 Fast Tone 272 UNDERSTANDING THE
202. coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Continued 546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE CAUTION Continued Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below
203. d This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sx 9 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 3 Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate CINCH If Equipped 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Next pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path
204. d Capacity 5x3 vau eo eet eue ences 442 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 460 Pressure Warning Light 316 Quality Grading seen RR 595 Radial restes ence Bean ome eer ep eo d 450 Replacement 44iikeedeesk dps tege x dE d 456 ee INDEX 615 Rotation iuc aes bowie Een ae en ac ad 459 DOLCE sumus ice dne em gene tka Ree Sanaa 436 SIZOS 4 dd ded gis oe Se Re Sa ee A qupd 438 Snow Tires speral Save dea ew boa eis oS 451 spare Pre secre sosed v aed ehh ebd nbi e 500 SPINNE iar scarce dor RR RTT dea RR CR ed ad 454 Trailet Towing cet cece mii hegi ees 491 Tread Wear Indicators nanena annaa aea 455 Tire Safety Information liliis 436 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 488 TOWING oc cee ia bed d eden dub be nq eames 484 Disabled Vehicle sss 519 GUIDE oru eade ace eaeque d EY Y a 488 Recreational leen 496 Weight c esoebk bh ERH RE HE Sees 488 Traction si aA cs eee Sad sd alee Sa Rie Gs B4 419 Traction Control piesti enseres i rda ees 429 Trailer lOWing ey ere b e ae aed 484 Cooling System Tips llle 496 Pitches cositas Seated qe Bra rd aite UR Seana Ue ad 487 Minimum Requirements sess 489 jo mm 495 Trailer and Tongue Weight 488 Witing ure obe d Ebr bed ee ek d 493 Trailer Towing Guide ccie siret orme tisis tars 488 Trailer Weight s sete teca misde edo ehe 488 Transfer Case llle 554 Fluid uxo f
205. d are recom mended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery Location 8134298a 536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post
206. d to the upright position make Rear Seatback Loop sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the After releasing the seatback it can be folded forward seatback above the seat strap ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper sta bility for child seats and or passengers An improp erly latched seat could cause serious injury e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steer ing column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions e Passive Entry door handles cannot be
207. d twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps en STARTING AND OPERATING 393 1 Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position If Engine Fails To Start 2 Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC ass displays ACC e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the 3 Press the ENGINE START STOP buttonasecondtime throttle body airinlet opening in an attempt to start to change the ignition switch to the RUN position the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing EVIC displays RUN serious personal injury nm Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
208. doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system For further information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open and the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Please see your authorized dealer for service Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The vehicle was in motion then speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h and the transmission shift lever is placed in NEUTRAL 3 The driver door is opened 4 The doors were not previously unlocked Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming To ch
209. dren who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for WARNING as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or All children whose weight or height is above the forward
210. dte d E ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED 395 Bl AUTOSTICK esos ee ae dee RE na Operation Eight Speed Transmission If Equipped sss eda eed Cewek ewe 413 386 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Operation Five Speed Transmission 415 Mi ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM 426 E SPORT MODE 5 7L ONLY IF EQUIPPED 417 B ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 428 E ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD IF EQUIPPED 418 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 428 E DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES 419 Traction Control System TCS 429 Acceleration 4 iis pid ER pae ar ti 419 Brake Assist System BAS 429 Traction duae ace AS ene e om do 420 Electronic Stability Control ESC 430 ll DRIVING THROUGH WATER 420 Hill Start Assist HSA 432 Flowing Rising Water 420 Ready Alert Braking sec tocea mitrie 434 Shallow Standing Water 421 Rain Brake Support 0 00 434 B POWER STEERING 0000 422 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And E FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY IF EQUIPPED ESC OFF Indicator Light 435 5L ENGINE ONLY e emm 423 Synchronizing ESC iare ten dc s 436 E PARKING BRAKE 000005 424 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387
211. e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized e ry ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfer ing with the pedals or
212. e 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 439 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 440 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Identif
213. e transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your Continued vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 491 WARNING Continued Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on WARNING Continued e Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic ratings are not exceeded transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded 1 Max loading as defined on the Tire and Loading Information placard 2 GTW Continued 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti lized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires
214. e 97 Safety Information Tire 0 0 436 Safety Ipsu npk deea Rcs eT anew ay cde 97 Schedule Maintenance llle 580 Seat Belt Maintenance lille 560 Seat Belt Reminder riasin aep ni naa 57 Seat Belis oo isses eu es a s 45 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 53 And Pregnant Women llle 58 Child Restraint 0 0000 74 Extender esce br eR REESE edes 58 Front Seat sls Ree eR RO E P eR 49 Inspection us ser pk tees er beris E 98 Operating Instructions llle 50 Pretensionets uve ehem eso e eda ew sas 57 Rear Seat axes drew t ba e gue id 49 Untwisting Procedure 0004 54 BEATS sick ake aya eae a deae ER a E ark qe AGER eg 199 Adjustment lt e a4 eph E eb RE RS 199 Easy Entry ecese aod IRR mas ROADS TR Rt ae 216 Head Restraints ius sess e beer 209 H atedi 3 sous ieee e Sees titans ale 202 Height Adjustment sess rict llle 199 Memory zx dumme dere USES E Ee 213 POWO cer m sti un e Ci Oh ahhh ey Be Ae s 199 Rear Folding cennus aia aa b nn 211 Seatback Release 1 6 0 ee eee 211 THN isses e oa eee ee eee 199 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 577 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 Sentry Key Programming 0 000000 17 Sentry Key Replacement 0004 16 Dervice Assistants ea awa Cae dd aed 589 Service Contract is capaci Bae dera kik
215. e connection Emergency And Towing Assistance The 911 Help numbers can only be altered These can not be deleted or the names can not be changed To change the 911 Help number follow these steps Touch the phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen Touch the 911 Help soft key Touch the appropriate listing to alter Emergency for example Once Emergency is touched the Edit soft key appears Touch the Edit soft key and you will be given the choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default Follow the on screen prompts to complete the task Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Redial Dial by touching in the number Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Number Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back e Mobile Phonebook Recent Call Log NOTE All of the above operations except Redial can be done with 1 call or less active Dial By Saying A Number e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt a
216. e ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat After cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remain
217. e is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You Fuel Funnel could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling STARTING AND OPERATING 481 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release 1 Open the trunk 2 Remove the access cover located on the left side inner trim panel Access Cover 482 STARTING AND OPERATING EE 3 Pull the release cable Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Release Cable VEHICLE LOADING e The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN ee STARTING AND OPERATING 483 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passeng
218. e more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361 Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Personal Settings Linked To FOB If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the A
219. e on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result 296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The center console outlet is powered directly from the There is also a 12 volt power outlet located on the back of battery power available at all times Items plugged into the center console for rear passengers This power outlet this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the has power available only when the ignition is placed in engine from starting the ACC or RUN position Center Console Power Outlet Rear Center Console Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 072736519 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel amp Power Outlet Console Rear 2 38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest 298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION CAUTION Continued After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alt
220. e shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Turn the engine OFF 2 Firmly apply the parking brake WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 515 3 Remove the rubber liner from the storage tray located 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position OXY SUUS SILEN On SH GORUCS Cone are 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 8 Reinstall the rubber storage bin liner 5 Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port in the left side of the storage bin and push and hold MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED the override release lever in TRANSMISSION 3 6L Engine WARNING Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle 051210780 Shift Lever Override 516 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK such as a dead battery a Manual Park Release is available Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release NOTE To prevent the vehicle from rolling
221. e structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure sure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 442 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 811ad0d0 Tire Placard Location Tire And Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF qu anos AE SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR TIRE FRONT SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE P195 70RT4 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIRE SEE OWNER S
222. e sure you have the correct seat for your child ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety WARNING Standards You should also make sure that you can install In a collision an unrestrained child can become a it in the vehicle where you will use it projectile inside the vehicle The force required to NOTE For additional information refer to hold even an infant on your lap could become so www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana 8teat that you could not hold the child no matter dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web how strong you are The child and others could be site for additional information http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have
223. e to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system Information Provided by DEALER UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS ll INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 311 EVIC Red Telltale Lights 329 BB INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 312 Oil Change Due ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 313 Fuel Economy ce mee ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 314 Vehicle Speed os inse EN Pen 335 ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION Trip InfO ik e m mas 335 CENTEINEVIC saanectadea od asta sipi eae Units eee dee RR mE 336 PR RE Sa N d 326 Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 336 EVIC White Telltale Lights sess 327 MSE se Pelee etm hater iqq Md HG Turn Menu OFF 337 EVIC Amber Telltales seres 29 rv haec ee ee S OS uS as 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Bl Uconnect SETTINGS 00 337 W STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Hard K
224. e your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Outside Mirrors Approach Light If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with approach lighting contain one LED which is located in the upper outboard mirror glass corner The approach light supplies illuminated entry lighting which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open any door This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
225. eads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster SU EET S IMFuel Economy M x v 041041518 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e Radio Info Fuel Economy e Vehicle Speed e Trip Info Tire Pressure Vehicle Info Stored Warning Messages Turn Menu OFF es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel Press and release
226. ealer change the engine oil and oil filter disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline E STARTING AND OPERATING 473 Materials Added To Fuel CAUTION Continued All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter t
227. ease OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems mm Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different
228. ed Front Air Bags 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag de
229. ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode 264 Forward Collision Warning If Equipped 266 ll PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED is xuoex eiae ERE HOS 268 ParkSense Sensors ionnan annica 269 ParkSense Warning Display 269 ParkSense Display se nem 270 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense 273 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist SySlemu a s ue ee ed ea Wee dE cvi aces 273 Cleaning The ParkSense System 274 ParkSense System Usage Precautions 274 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se ll PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA TE EQUIPPED 5i 2veLigme Rer LRG Ae RS Turning ParkView On Or Off With Touch Screen Radio E OVERHEAD CONSOLE 0 0 Front Map Reading Lights Courtesy Lights 2 eeicek es Sunglasses Bin Door 0 0 ll GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Programming A Rolling Code Programming A Non Rolling Code Canadian Gate Operator Programming Using HomeLink 006 SECUN s cd aceite PA gn b alee ES Bow eases 289 Troubleshooting Tips 00 289 General Information 0 2
230. eeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types 452 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result
231. efroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 7 Rear Climate Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate controls if equipped The indicator will illuminate when the rear climate controls are ON Performing this function again will turn OFF the rear climate controls 8 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 9 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375 10 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync ind
232. eft Alarm Security Alarm 319 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 316 Traction Control 0000000000 435 Tum Signal wbbesc ce RR UG RE eR ee ees 101 Vanity Mirror eee 114 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 314 Loading Vehicles ls ues see eG eae 482 Capacities Js cbe d ps HeE TE Ed e IPAE E 484 TueS 4eed c ke a b ake oe EE RES 442 Load Leveling System sera etea nea tenana 307 LOEKS x t dem er al eae wl ea a Rea 30 Automate Door i 2 2ki eR ER Ru RE 32 Auto Unlock Child Protection Door Power Door Low Tire Pressure System Lubrication Body Maintenance Free Battery 000 Maintenance Procedures Maintenance Schedule Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine Manual Service Master Cylinder Brakes Memory Feature Memory Seat Memory Seat Memory Seats and Radio Methanol Mini Trip Computer en INDEX 609 IMGETOFS ez bep cue Ee ackm ues Pe eg 110 Automatic Dimming sci sre saa iisa meaac 110 Electric Powered 0 eee eee 113 Electric Remote 0 cee ee eee 113 Exterior Folding 2 552 6 beste awa ein 112 Heated saa ise reg E titan dare NET ud S 114 Outside 25 4 3 0 6 oS ica nated d E Pond Oe PE 111 Rea rview 22k hse Re GR RES G ee SS 110 Vanity snae ae AEs Che aaa dh a aC eer ea 114 Mode FuelSavet 2 2229 e ek ek ce oe rk ege 334 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System ss
233. ehicle 00 0 513 Fuel 222 9 pea EGG 3 RR x EG 470 AdditveS sLoRasssr ss eee ba a ek db 473 Clean Alf 3 eine neha xk a ae ode dr Rd 471 Conserving ie emesene t Baie aes er een 334 Ethanol amp stes edad bera EE Gee 471 Filler Door Gas Cap se ss isas iasan aie aa 318 Gasoline serea oan ds ees Alden oe Woe we alge RE 470 Gauge a dide be eA E edie ERG RE n 318 Light uu ied Sper where E Re erae dead 2 329 Materials Added llle 473 Methanol 2s pace 8G ace dren RR RD red 471 Octane Rating ecs seas ee d 470 Requirements 6 6 0 cee eee ee 470 Saver Mode isl tate oe ERR 334 Sp cilicati nS 2x xs oes e Eg ee ag Reg 577 Tank Capacity asara ngap ron eee 576 Fuel Flexible 0 ee es 474 Fuel Optimizer Ree Rojas 334 FuelSaver llle 334 FUSS a dee echo het aes hr Ru E ex Ou OY ea ws 561 Gasoline Clean Air ee 471 Gasoline Fuel 000 0 eee eee ee 470 CONSERVING sucks depo cs S Gwin x dE Reo te 334 en INDEX 605 Gasoline Reformulated llle 471 Gauges Coolant Temperature 0005 322 Fuel ue putant eh on Red uide eee 318 Speedometer git sew e RE RE he was 318 Tachometer sees duns eunt enpe s eR 314 Gear Ranges ss 4 2 ok meo e rae oe ded 400 Gear Select Lever Override 0 514 General Information sese cese pia sana er KEE aaa 17 Glass Cleaning 2s 3 dx ers ser eR a E 559 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0
234. ehicle using a commercial wrecker service Towing Condition Wheels OFF the RWD MODELS AWD MODELS Ground Flat Tow NONE IF Transmission is operable NOT ALLOWED Wheel Lift Front Transmission in NEUTRAL NOT ALLOWED e 30 mph 48 km h max speed e 15 mi 24 km max distance 5 speed trans e 30 mi 48 km max distance 8 speed trans Rear OK Trans in NEUTRAL Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD 520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the vehicle s key fob is unavailable or the battery is discharged see Manual Park Release or Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing Damage to the fascia will occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to the front or rear suspens
235. ehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result Jump Starting Procedure WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion 512 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE CAUTION WARNING Failure to follow these procedures could result in Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 1 Connect the positive 4 end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive 4 post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in negative post of the booster battery the reverse sequence 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis
236. eir use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate 596 Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is est
237. el economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset There is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display This icon will appear whenever the Multi Displacement System MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display es UNDE
238. elect ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Lights e Illuminated Approach Touch the Illuminated Approach soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlights With Wipers Touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key to change this display When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Auto High Beams SmartBeams Touch the Auto High Beams soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lig
239. eleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment e Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning ry Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Lig
240. en the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If you
241. ensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 9 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL LS The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION 10 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could 11 Fuel Door Reminder affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the flashing severe catalytic converter damage and lt Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the power loss will soon occur Immediate service is vehicle required 12 Fuel Gauge WARNING The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch
242. equipped will manually select the transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the ignition to the LOCK OFF position before restarting 408 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK OFF position first NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage You
243. equipped with power lumbar The power 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated using the Uconnect System WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 WARNING Continued Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat Front Heated Seat Operation Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect 4 3 Press the CLIMATE hard key located next to the Uconnect screen to enter the climate control screen Press the Driver or Pass
244. er belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac tor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi tion If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc
245. er device does not acti vate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps T 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid Press and hold the p
246. ere as SPORT or TRACK will be a firmer sportier suspension with better handling Track Mode This mode includes SPORT suspension and affects transmission shifting in either Auto or Manual mode Refer to AutoStick in Starting And Operating for further information In TRACK mode the transmission has a sportier more aggressive shift pattern In Manual mode the transmission will hold gear at redline during manual shifting console shifter or paddle shifters e ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with an active on demand All Wheel Drive AWD system which makes available optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary To maximize fuel economy your AWD vehicle automati cally defaults to rear wheel drive RWD when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction the vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera ture wheel slip or other predetermined conditions there may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condition occurs AWD can also be manually se lected by moving the shift lever into the AutoStick mode or activating the windshield wipers fo
247. erials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended 558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to
248. ernator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution Continued UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299 CUPHOLDERS Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console 035135226 Front Cupholders Retractable Cover 300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Heated and Cooled Cupholders If Equipped Press the Cold symbol once to turn on the cupholder press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off Press the Hot symbol once to activate the cupholder press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder WARNING When using the cupholder in the Hot position avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup holder in order to reduce the possibility of burns Persons who are unable to feel pain to the ski
249. ers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR 404 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be
250. ert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the OFF Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e Rain Sensing Touch the Rain Sensing soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Hill Start Assist If Equipped Touch the Hill Start Assist soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key and s
251. es kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549 e Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 OAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermo
252. ese areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best Continued 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions NE SUN fy 022641457 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and SE adjust the front seat Pulling Out The Lap Shoulder Belt L
253. ess and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when MAX A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the MAX A C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A C indicator will turn off 2 AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the A C operation to switch into manual mode and the A C indicator will turn off 3 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 4 AUTO Operation Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 5 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 6 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se An indicator will illuminate when the rear window d
254. ess of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545 Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill CAUTION If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper ant is different and should not be mixed with maintenance intervals Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en Selection Of Coolant gine coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine
255. essed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle cou
256. et speed If this occurs e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The system will not be controlling the distance be tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal NE 156789mi Driver Override 102 032363713 Driver Override To Cancel The system will disable ACC without erasing the memory if You softly tap the brake pedal You depress the brake pedal You press the CANCEL switch The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph 25 km h An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs e The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off ESC will automatically be re engaged ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 NE 156789mi 102 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Canceled P R N 032363714 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cancelled To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if You push and release the ON OFF button You turn OFF the ignition To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed NOTE You can resume ACC from a minimum of 18 mph 30 km h WARNING The
257. expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscrip tion iPod USB MP3 CONTROL This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect User s Manual HARMAN KARDON Logic79 HIGH PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon audio system with GreenEdge technology that offers superior sound quality higher Sound Pressure Levels SPL and reduced energy consumption The new system utilizes es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367 proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver ing substantial increases in component and system effi ciency levels The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power
258. exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position from the OFF position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Pa
259. eys es 337 IE EOUIPPED verer anie ter perte Reeere ed 368 E e ion cannamieneas IRR del 338 Radio Operation 0000006 368 Customer Programmable Features CD Player cuum RR wa Bde d s 369 Uconnect 43 Settings 338 Bl CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 369 Customer Programmable Features ll RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 370 a a ddr MM E TL aU CLIMATE CONTROLS ed ceret netto rid 370 iPod B Rode OR MED CONTRID scs agin dienes ind 966 General Overview lille 370 ll HARMAN KARDON Logic7 HIGH Hard K 370 PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND iL M AC ML QE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE Soft Keys iis sese ene as 372 SUE TE QOIS STECBRQOTURSBEE tort 052 aud Climate Control Functions 377 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 379 Operating Tips ssr ss die tbc ec Eie ae 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040138327 1 Air Outlet 7 ESC Off Switch 13 Engine Start Stop Button 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Uconnect System Hard Controls 14 Trunk Release Button 3 Hazard Switch 9 SD Memory Card Slot 15 Dimmer Controls 4 Uconnect System 10 Power Outlet 16 Hood Release 5 Climate Control Hard Controls 11 CD DVD Slot 17 Headlight Switch 6 Glove Compartment 12 Storage Compartment 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER EI EO 4sg86 r
260. f Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 513 Hazard Warning Flasher 498 Jacking ice I RR 499 Jump Starting aco ew Rh oe ee 509 Overheating iie penta ies Red eee d 498 Towing Emergency Trunk Release 4 45 Emission Control System Maintenance 527 Enpine eneren ipanaa d PRESA RR ER PEU a Re al 526 Adr Cleaner otc eo Pd ed E 534 Block Heater nee Sannie 395 Break In Recommendations 95 Checking Oil Level srp 224445644 04 4 550 531 Compartment 0 0 0 6 525 Compartment Identification 525 Coolant Antifreeze 2 lesen 544 COONS is sce obtu y obese ee so ene a es 544 Exhaust Gas Caution 00000004 97 Fails to Start e RR eR ues 393 Flooded Starting ills 393 Fuel Requirements 0 00000005 470 Jump Starting sserrep eee 509 SM cT 531 Oil Change Interval css 25284200883 ema 332 Oil Filler Cape esye parece lth bos S Greig elie Batre ls 533 en INDEX 603 Qil Selecon sirere ianei a hope ae ae eir E s 532 Oil Synth tie m ace derat awe etit acd dna x 533 Overheating iie RR REPRE si 498 Stating CDD 390 Temperature Gauge llle 322 Engine Oil Viscosity sae e Ras 533 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart lesse 533 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 69 Entry System Illuminated 20 Eth nol o codri e d es a Hay ur qs 471 Event Data Recorder llle 73
261. facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt child restraint When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not the
262. facturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551 WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate t
263. fficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed EI C c c KC 1 Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 me dium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC NE 156789mi 102 ACC 200 km h Distance 3 NI 032363707 Distance Set 3 long UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 NE 156789mi 102 ACC 200 km h Distance 2 u F EJ 032363708 Distance Set 2 medium 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NE 156789mi ACC 200 km h Distance 1 102 032363709 Distance Set 1 short To change the distance setting press the Distance button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting adjusts between 3 long 2 medium and 1 short If there is no vehicle ahead the vehic
264. folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap 035235231 Front Door Trim Storage ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305 WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper sta bility for child seats and or passengers An improp erly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts WARNING The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos sible e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight
265. for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic 530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CAUTION Continued The pages that follow contain the required maintenance Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids services determined by the engineers who designed your that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo maintenance schedule there are other components which nents as the chemicals can damage your engine may require servicing or replacement in the future transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle CAUTION Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 3 6L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication
266. forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle Side Monitoring 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either i of less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 1
267. from DRIVE Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission may operate only in certain gears or may not shift at all Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall In some situations the transmission may not re engage if the engine is turned off and restarted The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions and indicate what actions may be necessary In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps NOTE In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re engage after en gine shutdown perform this procedure only in a desired location preferably at your authorized dealer 1 Stop the vehicle 406 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 Shift the transmission into PARK if possible Turn the engine OFF 3 4 Wait approximately 30 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your ea
268. fter five seconds of no ACC display activity 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Display Warnings And Maintenance Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the EVIC will display Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate The Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille To keep the ACC System operating properly it is imp
269. g original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as recommended by the traction device manufacturer Continued 458 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM e Install on Rear Tires Only CAUTION Due to limited clearance the Security Chain Company SCC Super Z6 low profile traction device or equiva lent is recommended on P215 65R17 P225 60R18 or fllewing precautions P235 55R18 tires e Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is For an All Wheel Drive vehicle P235 55R19 tire with important that only traction devices in good condi the use of a traction device that meets the SAE type tion are used Broken devices can cause serious Class S specification is recommended damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage Remove WARNING the damaged parts of the device before further use Using tires of different size and type M S Snow To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the e Install device as tightly as possible and then re tighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment between front and rear axles can cause unp
270. g the call To transfer an ongoing call from your paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send
271. h the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column mist a AE orr 32 201 TTA LS T WIPER Se Ro 031563089 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you t
272. h to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 4 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange Front Jacking Location NOTE If the vehicle is too low for jack placement slide the jack on its side and rotate it up into position 506 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and tire 7 Mount the spare tire CAUTION Rear Jacking Location Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the and install the spare tire spare tire is mounted incorrectly WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 507 Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited Use Spare under Tires General Information in Start ing and Operating for additional warnings cautions and information about the spare tire its use and operation 8 Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
273. haust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged 542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Continued be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded g
274. he Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone bution on the Available commands while phone call is in progress The commands can be spoken from any screen while a call is active after pushing the Uconnect voice command button t on the steering wheel Shows the phonebook entry for John Smith with all stored numbers Incoming call list will be shown Number is Dial Tones for dialed Dial Tones numbers stored in for 12344 Voicemail are sent Password are sent associated wth entry is dialed incoming call is 030863306 Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 NOTE e e You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other Yo
275. he brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid specifications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553 Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmissio
276. he headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The Headlight Time Delay is programmable us ing theUconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights will turn On the first time the vehicle is shifted out of PARK and remain On unless the Parking Brake is applied Upon returning to the PARK position the DRLs will turn Off DRLs will turn Off when the ignition is switched OFF NOTE The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch EI D Fog Light Switch To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate wit
277. hen in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected
278. hen maxi mum engine speed is reached On some models the transmission will downshift when possible based on vehicle speed and gear if the accelerator is fully pressed If AutoStick is engaged while in SPORT mode manual gear selection will be maintained until either SPORT mode is exited or as described below The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in this mode nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor 416 STARTING AND OPERATING EE e The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows down to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated You can start out in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right or press and hold the shift paddle if equipped until D is once again displayed in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without t
279. hen the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Astronomy Zone System Temporarily Unavailable When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will display the message Blind spot system unavailable Astronomy zone The side mirrors LED s will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone Uconnect 4 3 Uconnect 4 3 Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated features e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 Redialing last dialed numbers Redial Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features Dialing via Keypad using touch screen Viewing and Calling contacts from
280. his display When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Speed Adjusted Volume Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft key to change this display This feature increases or decreases volume rela tive to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the OFF 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound Touch the Surround Sound soft key to change this dis play This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection press the Surround Sound soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Phone Bluetooth e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement SIRIUS Setup e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip Then touch the arrow back soft key E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 e Subscription Info New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Sub
281. ht in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Dri
282. hts If Available Touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Steering Directed Lights If Equipped Touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Flash Lights With Lock Touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Doors amp Locks e Auto Unlock On Exit Touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key to change this display When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the
283. ication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of c
284. ication Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 05301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 HEEEEE STARTING AND OPERATING 441 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is th
285. icator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature 11 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The speeds can be selected using either hard heys or soft keys as follows NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off po sition Blower control should be left in the ON position to allow the climate control to either warm or cool the vehicle Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft key Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 12 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows e Pa
286. ience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con ditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situa tions Operation Eight Speed Transmission If Equipped When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode it will operate automatically shifting between the eight available gears To engage AutoStick simply tap one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles while in DRIVE or SPORT mode Tapping to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower 414 STARTING AND OPERATING ME gear while using to enter AutoStick mode will retai
287. ier Vue uev eae qu 554 Maintenance lees 554 Transmission Automatic miinaa d y iea a 395 Fl id eee RERO a EG OP er dus 552 Maintenance lees 552 Shif ng uonide rece rr eb rep ed 395 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 24 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 21 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE Tread Wear Indicators 6016 INDEX aaa Trip Odometer 04 scesa tams xe oen xa 315 Trunk Lid Deck Lid ssh Rs 43 Trunk Release Emergency llle 45 Trunk Release Remote Control 43 Turn 5ignals 3 xem vers eeu Ee Panes 225 UCI Connector i 2i1i2 d e tme 366 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 595 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 366 Unleaded Gasoline llle 470 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 54 Vanity MirtOIS uude ue PU do p E Ua 114 Vehicle Certification Label 0 482 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 5 o ieee rem 443 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage s dre odes decer bh dedu os 381 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Viscosity Engine Oll iie e ere mers 533 Warning Flasher Hazard 200 498 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 314 Warnings and Cautions llle 6 Warranty Information llle 592 Washer Adding Fluid 22m 9k ERR Ses 541 Wa
288. ifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON RUN or ACC position The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column mst s EM OFF Q7 EC 11 7 WIPER Qo LO 031563089 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 are five delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off Continued CAUTION Continued In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipe
289. ill be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 20 O D Overdrive OFF Indicator Light Bee This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected and overdrive has been turned off 21 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 22 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge r
290. inal equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as 454 STARTING AND OPERATING M your original equipment tire replace or repair the Tire Spinning original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the Wien studk in mud sand snow ur ice conditions do mot first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the origin
291. ing ENGINE Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020241333 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle th
292. ing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid Headlights On With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions
293. ion Route Guidance Prompt is repeated Player Home screen will shown on the touch screen EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 NOTE 3 Navigation commands only work if equipped with 1 Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles Navigation 2 You can replace Player with Radio Navigation age pee Non Commands are shown in bold Phone Climate More or Settings grey 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Uconnect Voice Command Navigation Universal Commands The commands can be spoken on any screen when not on phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command bu ot va on the steering wheel Garmin will choose an alternate route that does not include the next turn displayed 030563042 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 NOTE WARNING 1 You can also say Find City Find Favorite Find Play by Category Find Play by Name Find Recently Found Where to or Go Home It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured 2 You can say Find Nearest then Restaurant Fuel or killed Transit Lodging Shopping Bank Enter e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your tainment Recreation Attractions Commu vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat ni
294. ion and death or serious personal ane injury apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed e The ACC system the original set speed automatically to maintain a e If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will Continued EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 WARNING Continued WARNING Does not react to pedestrians oncoming ve You should switch off the ACC system hicles and stationary objects e g a stopped e when driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet vehicle in a traffic jam ora disabled vehicle heavy traffic and complex driving situations e g Cannot take street traffic and weather condi in highway construction zones tions into account and may be limited upon When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp adverse sight distance conditions when driving on roads that are winding icy snow Does not predict the lane curvature or the move ment of preceding vehicles and will not compen sate for such changes Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehi cle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop The Cruise Control system has two control modes covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes e When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes e When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a cons
295. ion components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing e Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result e The manufacturer does not recommend towing this vehicle using a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur Flatbed towing is recommended DO NOT tow an AWD vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521 If the transmission is operable vehicles WITHOUT AWD CAUTION may be towed with rear wheels on the ground under the following conditions Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require e The transmission must be in NEUTRAL ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the e The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h New Vehicle Limited Warranty e The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km for 5 speed transmission or 30 miles 48 km for 8 speed transmission Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on speed or distance If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km for 5 speed transmission or 30 miles 48 km for 8 speed transmission tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in NEUTRAL
296. ion to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 19 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected ee 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system w
297. ion to the ON RUN position 288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash afte
298. ir stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri odically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety M J 022668173 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for L
299. is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Continued 448 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consump tion Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible
300. is to keep the ParkSense system operat ing properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE CAUTION position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in e Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulde
301. ists of a transfer case and front differential The exterior surface of these compo nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible The transfer case fluid fill inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing To inspect the transfer case fluid level remove the fill inspection plug The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole Use this plug to add fluid as required The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment To inspect the differ ential fluid level remove the fill plug The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole Fluid Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Rear Axle For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information ee MAINTAININ
302. ists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 ELECTRONIC STABILITY e amp amp Hart C m 9 ei 3 5002 QE eC 2 E ea MA awo srake ENONEOL neaRwwoow ELECTRCALY MAKUGNIS REARFOGLAN ANDUFTGATE DEFROSTANO VENTLATNGFAN WNOOWLOCK THROTTLE FOURWNED WARNING PARKING E3 Gp qp
303. itters may be always remember to place the ignition in the OFF Performed at an authorized dealer position General Information At the time of purchase the original owner is provided The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is subject to the following conditions required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a This device must accept any interference that may be blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob received including interference that may cause unde is one that has never been programmed sired operation This device may not cause harmful interference 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro vide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrumen
304. ivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Weight Max Tongue Weight See Note 3 6L Automatic 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 5 7L Automatic 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 489 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight
305. ke brake pedal or the shift lever e When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Continued 426 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued CAUTION Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle l l l ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased failure and a collision vehicle stability and brake performance under most e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav braking conditions The system automatically pumps ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in Wheel lock up PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injur
306. ke Support Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also oe flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to fla
307. ke sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 457 WARNING WARNING Continued Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure ani loss Ore ele control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings ive for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body capacity other than what was originally equipped clearance Follow these recommendations to guard on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load against damage index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision CAUTION Replacin
308. l call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will in struct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone
309. lays Adaptive Cruise Control Off NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions e When you apply the brakes When the parking brake is set e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE mm VERSE or NEUTRAL When pushing the RES button without a previously set speed in memory 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To Activate To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF Push and release the ON OFF button The ACC menu in esi un i P the aA yo ia ui and the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Ready the err ay aptive Cruse Contro i NE 156789mi 102 NE 156789mi 102 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Adaptive Cruise Control ACC OFF Ready f Ma 032363703 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Ready Adaptive Cruise Control ACC OFF 032363702 WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 NE 156789mi 102 ACC Set 032363724 ACC Set Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the s
310. lays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays then press SELECT to display any one of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans Temperature Displays the actual transmission temperature es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Messages Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons This feature shows the number of stored warning mes sages in the place holder Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Menu Turn Menu OFF Select from Main Menu
311. ld go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF preset following distance while matching the speed of EQUIPPED the vehicle ahead Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving wARNNG convenience provided by cruise control while traveling WARNING on highways and major roadways However it is not a 54 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience safety system and not designed to prevent collisions system It is not a substitute for active driving ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in involvement It is always the driver s responsibil light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant My to be attentive of road traffic and weather need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road NOTE conditions Your complete attention is always re e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you quired while driving to maintain safe control of ACC will maintain a fixed set speed your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collis
312. le will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 24 km h and the system automatically disengages itself The distance setting is changed The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead NE 156789mi 102 BRAKE 032363710 Brake Alert 3 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NE 1567
313. led OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on wh
314. lert the driver 030405522 RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 NOTE In a parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Blind Sp
315. letes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac tivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert9 seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way
316. lication and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated 430 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the act
317. linked to the memory function Use either the memory recall switch or the RKE transmitter if linked to the memory feature to recall memory positions 1 or 2 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The memory seat switch is located on the driver s door Programming The Memory Feature trim panel The switch consists of three buttons The S button which is used to activate the memory save function and the 1 and 2 buttons which are used to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles To create a new memory profile perform the following NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory 1 Place the ignition into the RUN position 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets 3 Press and release the SET S button on the memory switch 4 Within five seconds press and release the MEMORY button 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information A 031036877 Center EVIC if equipped will display which quipp play Memory Seat Switches memory position has been set N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be turned on and off
318. listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NOTE Pressing the or EVR buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further information Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK 1 You can do either of the following a Press the Settings hard key Page down to the Phone Bluetooth soft key press it and you will see the Paired Phones screen If there are no paired phones you will see lt Empty gt as the first device name b Press the MORE hard key then press the Phone soft key and you will go to the Uconnect Phone main screen Press the Settings soft key If there are no phones currently paired a pop up will appear If you select Yes you will go the Paired Phones screen if you select No you will return to the Uconnect Phone main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 2 At the Paired Phones screen press the Add Device soft key and a pop up with instructions will a
319. lls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command Sve Button is t VR only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The Sve button is also used to access the Voice Com mands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the Sve button The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or another prompt UNDERSTANDING THE
320. lly after approximately 45 minutes Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passen gers to operate the seats independently You can choose from HI LO or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI one for LO and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HI level heating Press the switch a second time to select LO level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl level If the Hl level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after
321. lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle To Enter The Trunk With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the deck lid press the button on the right side of CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light which is located on the deck lid CHMS
322. lock or unlock buttons NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time a If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the theft alarm 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked 021867956 x Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel
323. luetooth on your mobile service plan 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service pro vider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial e Dial by touching in the number e Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Name Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back e Favorite Phonebook Mobile Phonebook Recent Call Log e e SMS Message Viewer NOTE All of the above operations except Redial can be done with 1 call or less active Dial By Saying A Number e Press the button to begin After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number 248 555 1212 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name e Press the e button to begin After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Call Controls The touch screen allows you to control the following call features e e e e e Answer End Ignore Hold unhold Mute unmute T
324. main on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 e If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immedi ate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H or 260 F this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H or 260 F the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for
325. may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade Continued when pulling a trailer 434 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another ve hicle or object Always remember to use the park ing brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Ready Alert Braking Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Bra
326. ment The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE Deus loaded OncHie velueley That weiss may not The following table shows examples on how to calcu safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weigh
327. message sent e Press Send or Cancel Send Messages Using Voice Commands e Press the w button After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Send message to John Smith mobile After the system prompts you for what message you want to send say the message you wish to send or say List There are 18 preset messages While the list of defined messages are being read you can interrupt the system by pressing the avr button and saying the message you want to send After the system confirms that you want to send your message to John Smith your message will be sent UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 t FM 95 5 70 out Messaging gt Inbox 1 Yes New 2 No Message 3 Okay 4 I can t talk right now 5 Call me 6 I ll call you later bd 18 items in list a NES Nav Radio Player Controls Clirnate Phone More 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se List of Preset Messages 10 I will be number minutes late 1 Yes 11 See you in number minutes 2 No 12 Stuck in traffic 3 Okay 18 Start without me 4 I can t talk right now 14 Where are you 5 Call me 15 Are you there yet 6 TIl call you later 16 I need directions 7 I m on my way 17 I m lost 8 Thanks 18 See you later 9 TIl be late ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connectio
328. mote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Manual Seats If Equipped Forward Or Rearward Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear ward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Using body pressure move forward and rear ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Manual Seat Adjusting Bar 030934979 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever Manual Recline Lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Hn
329. mpact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference ram This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses United States MRXC4W4MA4 Canada 2546A C4W4MA4 470 STARTING AND OPERATING ME FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso a line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 5 7L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high
330. n If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP mes sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature con dition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information STARTING AND OPERATING 423 NOTE Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect 424 STARTING AND OPERATING PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever
331. n Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled cupholders The cupholders are designed to help keep warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injuries medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise par ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injury Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the Heat position 035136627 Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301 Rear Seat Cupholders Lighted Cupholders If Equipped The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear forward in the armrest and side by side to provide con passengers The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer venient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintain Control Refer to Lights in Understanding The Fea ing a resting place for the rear occupant s elbows tures Of Your Vehicle for further information Rear Seat Cupholders Light Ring In Rear Cupholder 302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Glovebox Storage The glovebox storage compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment Console Features There is an
332. n Indicator Light will turn off NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESC on again by momen tarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 432 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and
333. n The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided Your authorized dealer can check your trans mission fluid level using special service dipstick If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis sion damage CAUTION e If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your au thorized dealer immediately Severe transmission damage may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE In addition change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped The all wheel drive system cons
334. n the current gear When AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will only shift up or down when is manually selected by the driver unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen except as described below If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode the transmission will automatically shift up when maxi mum engine speed is reached If the accelerator is fully pressed the transmission will downshift when pos sible based on current vehicle speed and gear Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmis sion to revert to automatic operation If AutoStick is engaged while in SPORT mode manual gear selection will be maintained until either SPORT mode is exited or as described below The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in this mode nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor In either DRIVE or SPORT mode the transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop to prevent engine lugging and will display the cur rent gear Tapping the paddle at a stop will allow starting in second gear After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle accelerates To disengage AutoStick mode press and hold the 4 shift p
335. n causing serious injury or death When you press the Uconnect Voice Command CVR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command If no command is spoken the system will say one of two responses e I didn t understand e I didn t get that etc If a command is not spoken a second time the system will respond with an error and give some direction as what can be said based on the context you are in After three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR session with end Pressing the Uconnect Voice Command Sve button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can say a command This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel or Help ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear available commands press the Uconnect Voice Command vRbutton and say Help You will hear available commands for the
336. n to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone OFF ON Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Available commands while phone call is in progress The commands can be spoken from any screen while a call is active after pushing the Uconnect voice command button Uconnect Hands Free Calling The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone button Ne onne t on the steering wheel Shows the associated incoming eao eus Number is Dial Tones for wth entry is call is bas entry for ry dialed Dial Tones numbers stored in dialed om gom al for 12348 Voicemail are sent Password are numbers sent 030863306 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 NOTE e You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Call
337. navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or another prompt For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mobile For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound command form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language V
338. ncrease from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 450 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs All Season Tires If Equipped All Sea
339. nctionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer 3mi ACC FCW BIETET Service Required 035468894 ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required Warning PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30
340. nd may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements ee STARTING AND OPERATING 487 WARNING Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions e An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch P system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible _ Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch _ Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Class IV Extra Heavy 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Vehicle dealer for additional information Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum The following chart provides the industry standard for Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can drivetrain tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Trailer Hitch Classification All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 488 STARTING AND OPERATING x Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given dr
341. nd the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e The Uconnect Phone will dial 248 555 1212 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name e Press the w button to begin After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated ras with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Call Controls The touch screen allows you to control the following call features e Answer e End e Ignore e Hold unhold 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Mute unmute e Transfer the call to from the phone e Swap 2 active calls Join 2 active calls together Touch Tone Number Entry Touch the Phone soft key Touch the Dial soft key The Touch Tone screen will be displayed Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the Sve button while in a call and say 1234 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail pass word is stored in your mobile phonebook Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Missed Calls e All Calls These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the button and say Show my incoming calls from any sc
342. nection be shown process will be List of paired phones will be shown completed with touch screen 030563044 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration VOICE COMMAND Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav 4 VR NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Command system as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Command system to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level The Uconnect Voice Command system allows you to control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player SD Card USB iPod and Sirius Travel Link 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws All attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collisio
343. nel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode e Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and P loor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets e Floor Mode m Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode Ge Air comes from the floor defrost and side window gt demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions e Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower level may will increase es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377 13 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 14 Driver Temperature Control Down Button
344. ng and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle 406 ST
345. nic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021341332 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lights With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect
346. nlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors On 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all the doors or use the RKE transmitter e Memory Linked to FOB Touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft key to change this display This feature provides automatic driver seat po sitioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle driver 1 and driver 2 last mode settings and presets To make your selection touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Re
347. nnect Voice Command Travel Link commands The commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect voice command button VR on the steering wheel Screen will change to Travel Link Movie Listings Screen will Screen will Screen will change to change to change to Travel Link Travel Link NFL Sports Favorites Headlines Screen will Screen will Screen will change to change to change to Travel Link Travel Link Travel Link Home Fuel Prices Weather 030563045 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 NOTE 3 You can also say Show Current Weather or Show extended weather or Show five day forecast or 1 You can replace NFL with any league shown on the Show ski info to get other forecasts sports league screen For example you can say Show MLB headlines or Show PGA headlines NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold 2 You can replace Headlines with any menu items EGO ana EBAL shown on a league screen For example you can say Show NFL Schedule and results or Show NCAA Basketball AP top 25 or Show Major League Baseball Teams 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Command Non phone Universal amp Mode Commands The commands can be spoken on any screen when not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button 4 VR on the steering wheel Cancels listening to your voice command Navigat
348. nu e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Compass Settings After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This i
349. nual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing out No phone connected NOTE Would you like to pair a phone e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK e es L 1 Press the Phone soft key on the screen to begin Radio Playor Controls Climate hone Moo y 8 2 If there is no phone currently connected with the f 3 Select Yes to begin the pairing process Then search system a pop up will appear for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen e If No is selected touch the Settings soft key from the Uconnect Phone main screen e Touch the Add Device soft key 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen e See Step 4 to complete the process 4 Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen while the system is connecting 68 4 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Bluetooth Connection in progress Please wait v C SW o Player Controls Climate Nav Phone More 5 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make
350. o overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Continued 474 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the
351. o remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced the SmartBeam mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer To Activate 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position 2 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you or rearward in car to manually deactivate the system normal operation of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn t
352. o switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off Front Map Reading Lights The front map reading lights are mounted in the over head console 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either Courtesy Lights side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top corner of the lens To turn the lights off press the lens a second time 031464435 031433151 Courtesy Lights Front Map Reading Light Switches 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Ambient Light The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area 033333449 Ambient Light Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will
353. ock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed touching the handl
354. ock braking capa bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued 428 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that include Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System ICS Brake Assist System BAS and the Electronic Stability Control ESC All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions
355. ockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 030407085 This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature will be defaulted on and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse mmEEEmmm UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING 030436523 Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side Automatic Dimming Mirror convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your CAUTION passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Us
356. of a button as long as the Remote Start Keyless Enter N Go FOBIK is in the passenger compartment e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle Normal Starting ram Sl ang a complete stop and the engine de at Using The ENGINE START STOP Button Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot 1 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL is firmly on the brake pedal 2 Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once 3 The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds 392 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 4 If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be below 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is presse
357. of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path 4 click Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint you may have trouble tightening the seat belt If this happens discon nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt up to three full turns to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out away from the child restraint Repeat steps 4 to 6 above to complete the installation of the child restraint If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around
358. of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Continued 490 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Continued WARNING Continued Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and it will not shift during travel When trailering and do not make starts at full throttle This helps cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at can occur that may be difficult for the driver to the heavier loads control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engin
359. oice Recognition VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Command VR button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the e button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp e button on the radio control head 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the e or vk buttons when the system is
360. ok Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Managing Your Favorite Phonebook 68 s rFM91 7 10 10 Nw 54 out There are three ways you can add an entry to your ee Y oes Mone r
361. omano Favorite Phonebook uu amp Ana Conda Add to Favorites P 248 123 4567 1 During an active call of a number to make a favorite F 248 456 7891 touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone main screen a 248 577 6215 2 After loading the mobile phonebook select phone book from the Phone main screen then select the A 1 m appropriate n ber Touch the Ra next to the selected A J Em gt D k as number to display the options pop up In the pop up peice AO eE NOTE If the Favorites list is full you will be asked to remove an existing favorite 3 From the Phone main screen select phonebook From the phonebook screen select the Favorites soft key and then select the soft key located to the right of the phonebook record Select an empty entry and touch the on that selected entry When the Options pop up 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se appears touch Add from Mobile You will then be asked which contact and number to choose from your mobile phonebook When complete the new favorite will be shown 68 4 FM 91 7 gt 10 10 NW 54 out Phonebook Favorite Options cal e Voicemail Mobile Add from Mobile Favorites Empty Xi Mom s Cell Emergency Towing Assistance 5 items in list e Sy s e S P m L Radio Player More To Remove A Favorite e To remove a Favorite select phonebook from the Phone main screen e Next
362. on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur
363. on to help protect an occupant during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc 022641517 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head inj
364. one half turn and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight try a different seating position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage 4 7 1 Look behind the seating position where you Hi plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position see the charts above move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 2 Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint 3 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 022637851 Adjustable Headrest Downward Position 022636837 Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button 022636908 Tether Strap Mounting 1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook 3 Att
365. onitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e ParkView Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain
366. ontact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541 Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Ex
367. open cubby bin located forward of the shift lever Glovebox Storage Compartment Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the center console armrest Center Console Inside the center console armrest there is a removable upper storage tray that can be slid forward rearward on rails for access to the lower storage area This tray has an UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303 integrated coin holder along with additional area for small items like an ipod or phone Below the upper tray the lower storage compartment is made for larger items like CDs and tissue boxes In addition the 12 volt power outlet USB and Aux jack are located here WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury 304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Storage Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped with 60 40 The door panels contain storage areas Spat Falding Rear Soal The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the load floor When the seatback is
368. or tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 e If the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service e Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE Installing a vehicle front end protector or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Unavailable there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer NE 156789mi 102 Adaptive Cruise Control
369. or long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys tem is on The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Ad justable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse NOTE e Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel 032036861 Adjustable Pedals Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat pedal position Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre programmed posi tions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Fe
370. ories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of mes sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Examples of this message type are Memory System Unavailable Not in Park and Automatic High Beams On The Reconfigu
371. ormal Cruise Control 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Forward Collision Warning If Equipped The Forward Collision Warning FCW system provides the driver with audible and visual warnings within the EVIC when it detects a potential frontal collision The warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react and avoid the potential collision FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is probable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated NOTE The minimum speed for FCW activation is 10 mph 16 km h WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Changing FCW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The FCW St
372. ot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced NOTE Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Blind Spot Alert Off W
373. oth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing a numbered sequence 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Barge In Overriding Prompts The vR button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the Sve button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length e Touch the More soft key where available then touch the Settings soft key Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempt ing to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength and phone battery strength ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad WARNING Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort and convenience of you and your passengers Some of these should not be used when driving
374. out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by chil
375. ower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022668889 V Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position A Top Tether Anchorage Symbol ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the LATCH an chorage system to attach the child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restr
376. own twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is
377. pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a CAUTION standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU Module TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while electrical cord could cause electrocution shifting out of PARK 3906 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING WARNING Continued
378. peed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 e Music Info Cleanup This feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation To make your selection touch the Music Info Cleanup soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection touch the Surround Sound soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement SiriusXM Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the
379. ployment After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Air Bag Warning Light Advanced Front Air Bag Features e Steering Wheel and Column The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC o Knee Impact Bolster which may receive information from the front impact sensors e Instrument Panel e Driver Advanced Front Air Bag The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC ed for more severe collisions Front and Side Impact Sensors e Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag e e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protecti
380. ppear Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone select the Uconnect device and enter the PIN When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device e e Touch the Player hard key to begin Press the Source soft key Change the Source to Bluetooth Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled Audio Device When prompted on the device select the Uconnect device and enter the PIN Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE If No is selected device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices Show Paired Audio Devices 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
381. pressing the Uconnect Voice Com mand Sve button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 Starting Voice Recognition VR Session in Disc Bato layen Modes To switch to the disc mode say Change source to Disc In this mode you can say the following commands This command can be given in any mode or screen NOTE The commands can be said on any screen when e Track to change the track a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice m Command Sve button 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mm Voice Tree Uconnect Voice Command AM FM Satellite Radio available commands These commands can be spoken when the AM FM or Satellite radio is playing VR after pushing the Uconnect voice command buttc t on the steering wheel Commands only available Commands available in Commands only available in AM FM mode AM FM Satellite mode in Satellite mode Audio will Audio will Audio will Audio will change to the change to change to next Satellite satellite station Satellite Rock Station 80 s on 8 Channel 8 Audio will change to 950 AM change to the AM or FM frequency or Satellite Channel stored in preset 5 030563043 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 NOTE 3 You can replace 8 with any other satellite station 1 You can teplace 950 AM with any other AM or FM med received by the radio frequency such as 98 7 FM 4 You can replace rock with
382. provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver s view of the ground rearward of the front doors The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir rors in Reverse position es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030434975 Power Mirror Control The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right button to select the mirror that you want to adjust NOTE A light in the select button will illuminate indi cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the op
383. pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward 045635319 Door Lock Knob If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch The
384. quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufacturer recom mends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available EN STARTING AND OPERATING 471 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
385. r o o oe o oeo eo o og 2 2 2 2 2 d comes first S S S S S S S S S S S S S S N si8sg9 8lg 9 2 8 8 S8 8 n Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 C Or Kilometers 2 e88 S S S s s E 3 38 8 3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 s 8 3 8 S S SlS SlLE S sla amp eg Additional Inspections n Inspect the CV joints X X X X py Inspect front suspension tie rod ends boot X X X X X X X UR seals and replace if necessary E Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front X X X X S axle fluid All Wheel Drive Only 8 Inspect the brake linings parking brake X X X X X X X function Inspect transfer case fluid All Wheel Drive X X X Only EE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 583 Ll A Mileage or time passed whichever o o oe o oe eo o og e 2 2 2 2 l comes first 98 9 88 8 8 8 S8 S S S S S S N ai e Fia c R S9 5 9 r S9 x L Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ssssssgissssssb SF sis si SS 8 E 9 R 8 SIE Inspect the transfer case fluid Change the S transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for Cc any of the following police taxi fleet off X X H road or frequent trailer towing All Wheel E Drive Only D Additional Maintenance h Replace engine air filter X X X X X E Replace cabin air conditioning filter X X X X X X X S Replace spark plugs 3 6L engine X 8 Replace spark plugs 5 7L engine X X X X X
386. r 20 seconds Do not release the button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEH
387. r Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 591 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provi
388. r an extended period of time Drive mode RWD or AWD is displayed momentarily in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the gage area of the vehicle display when the transmission is first shifted into gear and if the drive mode changes during vehicle operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 419 NOTE If the SERVICE AWD SYSTEM warning mes sage appears after engine start up or during driving it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that service is required Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires Unequal tire sizes must not be used Unequal tire size may cause failure of the front differential and or the transfer case DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc 420 STARTING AND OPERATING M
389. r up to approxi mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The Ignition Off time is programmable using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are three 12 Volt 13 Amps electrical power outlets on this vehicle The power outlets are protected by a fuse Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets for use to ensure proper operation NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295 CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Front Power Outlet The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only WARNING when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center consol
390. r vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine off When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Continued WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to
391. r vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work
392. r when using ParkSense e Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST message to be displayed in the EVIC 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist system Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surround ings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued Before using the Rear Park Assist system it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEA
393. rable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left EVIC White Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Shift Lever Status The shift lever status P R N D L 6 5 4 3 2 1 are dis played indicating the shift lever position Telltales 6 54 3 2 1 indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS feature has been engaged and the gear selected is dis played For further information on ERS refer to Starting And Operating 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Electronic Speed Control ON refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Electronic Speed Control SET refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON This light will turn on when the ACC is ON For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON For further information This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET For further information e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET This light will turn on when the ACC is SET For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of
394. ransfer the call to from the phone Swap 2 active calls Join 2 active calls together Touch Tone Number Entry Touch the Phone soft key Touch the Dial soft key e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the Sve button while in a call and say Send 1234 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types 68 4 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Recent calls gt Ana Conda Axel Schweiss Buddy s Pizza 248 990 6543 James Buttler D Dennett 7 items in list e Player D aw OFF Radio Controts Climate More Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Missed Calls e All Calls These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed You can also press the e button and say Show my recent calls from any screen and the All calls screen will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive
395. ransmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING When working near the radiator cooling fan disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the igni tion switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightn
396. rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the
397. re Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 461 The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu
398. re a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger First Row N A N A ALR Second Row ALR ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under
399. recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the Inflate to XX message Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing or change color back to the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 original color and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals
400. red for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SAB Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on several factors including the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle dec
401. redictable handling You could lose control and have a collision Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 459 CAUTION Continued These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires a The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with Observe the traction device manufacturer s instruc aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tions on the method of installation operating tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h e Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates 460 STARTING AND OPERATING The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed EE CC LE C EE XE 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressu
402. reen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will display a pop up showing Answer or Ignore Press the Answer soft key or the e button on the steering wheel to accept the call Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Uconnect Phone will then interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will display a pop up showing Answer Ignore or Transfer Press the e button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the amp vRbutton and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is
403. remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights if equipped that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the
404. res Voice Activated Features e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smith s Mobile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming SMS messages e Hands Free text messaging Send a message to John Smith s Mobile Redialing last dialed numbers Redial e Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back e View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls e Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features Dialing via Keypad using touch screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 e Sending a text message via the touch screen Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly NOTE Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer s
405. res This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Fuel Saver Technology Refer to Fuel Saver Technology If Equipped in Starting and Oper ating for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to 534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact yo
406. ressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure 466 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare tire when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 8 The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or changing color An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s
407. rliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Five Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position or tapping one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles Gif
408. rmarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued Air Bag Warning Light Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may 2 not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your e You will want to have the air bags ready to ry inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during modify the air bag system for persons with dis the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first abilities contact your authorized dealer cycled to the ON RUN The Air Bag Warning Light remains
409. rogrammed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287 To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Cycle the ignit
410. rompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Command Sve button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the e button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp e button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the w or vRbuttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NOTE Pressing the or vk buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further information Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ERASER 10 10 Nw 54 ence your mobile phone Owner s Ma
411. rs to return to the Park posi tion before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a pass
412. s nn STARTING AND OPERATING 437 NOTE e e e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design ram standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 438 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or Temporary spare tir
413. s or Missed Calls You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone These commands can be used during a phone call after pushing the Uconnect Voice Command button on the steering wheel Please note the call will be muted while the VR session is active Send dial tones for automated systems is available while a call is active This is an example that uses a Phonebook Record named Voicemail Password Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but only the first number encountered in a contact name will be sent For example if there is a number stored in the Home and Work numbers for the contact Voicemail password only the Home number will be sent If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth than these com mands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have been pre loaded in the phonebooks Commands such as Call Emergency and Call Towing Assistance will call the corresponding number stored with those contacts NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Uconnect Text Messagi Uconnect Text Messaging Reading Text aa The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushes tre Uccnnect Prone The commands con be spotan when the te
414. s 460 Mopar Parts 529 MIBEZETBE biex exea kW ke ea ee aed 471 Navigation System Uconnect gps 277 New Vehicle Break In Period l l 95 Occupant Restraints s aeree de Red 45 Occupant Restraints Sedan issus 62 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel sss 470 Odometer eee ace beats wed E RR oes 315 Oil Change Indicator ob re Re ES 315 Oil Change Indicator Reset 0 0 315 Qil Engines 4 sd tra PA edad EA AeA es 581 Capacity sos citro sd gigat me dir send G 576 Change Interval 2 vous ise ante EE eng 332 Checking uut dr Hoes e Under Mong sss 531 DIPSHCK 55 6d begat s Monee gt oae eed ugs 531 Disposal asses pei Meee ee ee ow ee eee 534 Filter eese epe e e haha Petes queas 584 Filter Disposal llle 534 Identification Logo es 6 eee 532 Materials Added to 000005 533 Recommendation esaesa nese sena e ea 532 SyBtlielG sissa mae Cx be E eR cis 533 MISCOSILY esai ar x arbe dE ane erede ERR e s 533 6010 INDEX eee Oil Filter Selection llle 534 Onboard Diagnostic System 0 527 Operating Precautions llle 527 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors 04 4 111 Ov rdrivei necs bce arid STR ordi edn pele esed 413 Overdrive OFF Switch 0 0 0 0 0 00004 413 Overheating Engine 0 00 eee 323 Owner s Manual Operator Manual
415. s Interior Lights 230 Daytime Running Lights 0 223 Dealer Service er 4 ee dw a RR Re 529 Deck Lid Emergency Release 45 Deck Lid Power Release 0 00005 43 Defroster Rear Window llle 306 Defroster Windshield llle 99 Delay Intermittent Wipers 00 230 Diagnostic System Onboard 527 Dimmer Switch Headlight 226 Dipsticks Oil Engine a cee o n aisi 531 Disabled Vehicle Towing 200 519 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 547 Door Locks 60564035 n rn t 30 Door Locks Automatic 0 0 0 0 0 0 eee eae 32 Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 2 eee eee 420 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy 334 602 INDEX MM E 85 F el i ii ee Ede oem e ey oe P e 474 Electrical Power Outlets llle 294 Electric Rear Window Defrost sess 306 Electric Remote Mirrors 0 0000 113 Electronic Brake Control System 428 Anti Lock Brake System 0 4 428 Brake Assist System llle 429 Traction Control System lille 429 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 240 Electronic Stability Control ESC issus 430 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 277 Emergency Deck Lid Release sisse 45 Emergency In Case o
416. s been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting Touch the Time Format soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
417. s display When in this display you may switch the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric then touch the arrow back soft key As you continue the information will display in the selected units of measure Voice Response Touch the Voice Response soft key to change the Voice Response Length settings To change the Voice Response Length press and release the Brief or Long soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Touch Screen Beep Touch the Touch Screen Beep soft key to turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button softkey is pressed To change the Touch Screen Beep setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key then touch the arrow back soft key e Fuel Saver Display Touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key to turn the ECO message located in the instrument cluster display on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Clock e Set Time Touch the Set Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may select the time display settings To make your selection touch the Set Time soft key adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down soft keys select AM or PM select 12 hr or 24 hr Then touch the arrow back soft key when all selections are complete E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 e Show Time Status To
418. s information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The TPM Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles With Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires ee STARTING AN
419. s on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 i ili p CAUTION NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys tem serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and authorized dealer lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat Customer Key Programming aS tended For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Programming Key Fobs or RKE transm
420. s where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings NUNT 6 7 8 9 Compass Variance Map 040506040 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e Balance Fade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the S
421. screen displayed Natural Speech Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Uconnect Voice Command AVR button 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEH C LE l Uconnect Voice Commands Changing the Volume The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command types of commands Universal commands are available at SVR button all times Local commands are available if the supported 2g P radio mode is active Ay a Loinen epe MCI 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com mand system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Start a dialogue by
422. scription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 8 4 Settings Press the More soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or press the X 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available e Display Mode W
423. se damage shallow standing water consider the following Caution to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always and Warning before doing so inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans CAUTIONI mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after e Always check the depth of the standing water driving through standing water Do not continue to before driving through it Never drive through operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami standing water that is deeper than the bottom of nated as this may result in further damage Such the tire rims mounted on the vehicle damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water e Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued 422 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases
424. seat soft key lo ay cated on the Uconnect screen once to select Hl level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF Front Heated Seat Operations Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect 8 4 and 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the Uconnect display NI TA OFF Player Controls Climate E More Controls Soft Key 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key ay once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF 4 Uu 95 5 C s Screen OFF Controls Driver Ju H M s ss He wea Whe Passenger looted Ye D H L 1 wf Radio Player Controls OFFER Climate More Nav Phone Heated Seats Soft Keys NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl level If the HlI level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after ap proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati ca
425. sed on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Change Oil or Oil Change Re quired message is displayed Severe Operating Condi tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information
426. settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381 against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls A
427. sh during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 436 STARTING AND OPERATING The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION b Electronic Stability Control ESC is off Tire Markings Synchronizing ESC disconnected or discharged the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESC Activation kh Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if i 9 the light remains on have the ESC and BAS checked at dm your authorized dealer as soon as possible 8 If the power supply is interrupted battery 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grade
428. shers Windshield 0000000008 231 Washing Vehicle 1 2 eee 556 a INDEX 617 Water Driving Through i sisena Kie nerd 420 Wheel and Wheel Trim llle 557 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care Ls 557 Wind Buftetngs ice cioe a LER 43 Window Fogging den die ee kiaad karosai 381 WIiNdOWSs 224 404 icc d24 8G 3 quic ek 8 dendo 40 POWer ci ve5 e504 boo eee os E93 eee ed E 40 Windshield Defroster ssa serii cesa hee ap Haan 99 Windshield Washers daek anne 230 Fluid uia 6i b eR hegira mitis 541 Windshield Wiper Blades 0 540 Windshield Wipers Ji e em esr 230 Wiper Blade Replacement lisse 540 Wipers Intermittent 00000 230 Wipers Rain Sensitive 6 0 0 0 0 scene 233 Information Provided by DEALER INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on
429. should always be properly re strained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Seat Belt Pretensioners
430. sions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French 592 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component
431. son tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on ee STARTING AND OPERATING 451 the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating sp
432. stat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manu
433. stener securing the spare tire 4 Remove the spare tire 502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5 Remove the fastener securing the jack WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas Jack Fastener WARNING 6 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off from the jack assembly the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Jacking And Changing A Tire Set the parking brake WARNING Place the shift lever into PARK f Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to Turn OFF the ignition help prevent personal injury or damage to your 6 Block the front and rear of the Vehicle wheel diagonally opposite of the e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the oT A Cc N jacking position For example if edge of the roadway as possible
434. sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRs Refer to the Tire Placard for your vehicle s proper tire pressure TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not ee STARTING AND OPERATING 485 exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starti
435. t cluster will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 additional minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods Press the UNLOCK button
436. t of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 892 kg 446 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Occupant 1 200 Ibs Weight Occupant 2 130 Ibs Occupant 3 160 Ibs 3 865 Ibs 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION y mn M i shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure
437. t provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick shift control if equipped to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift ing and heat buildup During extremely cold temperatures 22 F 30 C or below transmission operation may be modified depend ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 vehicle speed Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level SPORT If Equipped This mode alters the transmission s automatic shift schedule for sportier driving Upshift speeds are in creased to make full use of available engine power To switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes tap the shift lever rearward SPORT mode is only accessible from DRIVE LOW If Equipped Use this range for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range the transmission will down shift for increased engine braking LOW mode is only accessible
438. tain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause s
439. tandard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone Button is used to get into the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command vk Button is 4 VR only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to
440. tant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e Normal fixed speed cruise control mode is for cruis ing at a constant preset speed For additional informa tion refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section NOTE The system will not react to preceding vehicles Vu ors Always be aware of the mode selected CANCEL SET You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons steering wheel operates the ACC system 1 DISTANCE SETTING 2 RES 3 SET 4 CANCEL 5 ON OFF 6 MODE ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the ve hicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC disp
441. te interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The recirculation fea ture may be unavailable soft key greyed out if condi tions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield On systems with Manual Climate Controls the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected Attempt ing to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC ATC Hard keys are located in the center of the instru ment panel Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch screen Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 9 on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas senger temperature hard or soft control buttons 8 9 14 15 Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the se
442. the UP button to scroll up ward through the main menu and Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub menus Fuel Economy Ve hicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Trip Info Vehicle Speed and Turn Menu OFF and sub menus DOWN Button rm Press and release the DOWN button to scroll V downward through the main menu and Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Trip Info Vehicle Speed and Turn Menu OFF and 040909599 sub menus EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss SELECT Button gt Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus sub menus or to select a per sonal setting in the setup menu Press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds to reset features BACK Button Press the BACK button to scroll back to a BACK previous menu or sub menu Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC display consists of three sections 1 The top line where compass direction and outside temperature are displayed 2 The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed 3 The reconfigurable telltales section The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categ
443. the jack 060633619 do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury Mounting Spare Tire NOTE For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a hicl ing the jack center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare TIN Me eID Mee ene ey ne ane handle counterclockwise 508 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the WARNING Continued e Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tight places provided Have the deflated flat tire re ness of each lug nut is 110 ft Ib 150 N m Ifin doubt Paired or replaced immediately about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 1 Mount the road tire on the axle Road Tire Installation 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped of the jack faces the back of the vehicle before end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the tightening down the fastener lug nuts WARNING WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
444. the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 3 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the START STOP button once to return the ignition to the Trip Computer functions OFF LOCK position The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you tion start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 69mi 66 F c Fuel Economy AVG 19 6 Reset DTE 326mi Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func tions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode Distance To Empty DTE e Miles Per Gallon MPG Fiel Economy 041064063 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Average Fuel Economy ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fu
445. the side air bags the performance seriously injured or killed Occupants especially chil could be adversely affected and or objects could be dren should not lean on or sleep against the door side pushed into you causing serious injury windows or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Continued Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back use the seat belts properly and use the E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 appropriate sized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the front passenger and position the front occupant for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system requi
446. the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can in crease the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022635326 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Ad 2 Knee Bolster vanc
447. the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293 NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the
448. the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped Vehicle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when WARNING the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than Bot wit loaded vehicle or while pulling atraen hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is Towing With HSA responsible for braking the vehicle when the system will not activate and slight rolling
449. then pull the key out with your other hand Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 021337430 This device may not cause harmful interference Emergency Key Removal 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery proved by the party responsible for compliance could clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance
450. tick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section Pressing the shift paddles while in the DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shifting From PARK To DRIVE Firmly press the brake pedal press the lock button on the shift lever then pull and hold the shift lever fully rearward until D is displayed in the EVIC To shift back into PARK from DRIVE bring the vehicle to a complete stop fully press the brake pedal press the lock button on the shift lever then push and hold the shift lever fully forward until P is displayed in the EVIC Shifting From REVERSE To NEUTRAL Pull the shift lever rearward to the first detent and release N will display in the EVIC To shift back into REVERSE from NEUTRAL firmly press the brake pedal press the lock button on the shift lever then push the shift lever forward to the first detent and release R will display in the EVIC Shifting From NEUTRAL To DRIVE Firmly press the brake pedal press the lock button on the shift lever then pull the shift lever rearward and release D will display in the EVIC 400 STARTING AND OPERATING ME To shift back into NEUTRAL from DRIVE firmly press the brake pedal press the lock button on the shift lever then push the shift lever forward and release N will display in the EVIC Shifting From REVERSE
451. tion NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499 e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum WARNING WARNI heat the mode control to floor and the blower control SINS to high This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If from the engine cooling system you see or hear steam coming from under the hood cAUHON do not open the hood until the radiator has had time CAUTION to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure Driving with a hot cooling system could damage cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WA
452. tion Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the EVIC display It displays the gear position of the auto matic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC whenever the Electronic
453. tion when the window p The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 the DOWN position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle b
454. tional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Heated Mirrors If Equipped Ittt These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light Illuminated Vanity Mirror Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Sun Visor To use the Slide On Rod feature of the sun visor rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 parallel to the side window grabbing the sun visor with BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar rad PORON Due ve EXIEQIHOT feature Di he Sun lt i cad sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to visor grab the extender which is located at the rear ofthe detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks ees ca putei motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle
455. touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle 410 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the OFT posi tion to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle ee
456. tting soft key to change the setting using the description shown on the following pages for each setting 044336083 1 Uconnect 4 3 Settings Hard Key Settings Display Clock M5 Please select a setting Safety Assistance Exit Lights Ce Uconnect 4 3 Soft Keys Display e Brightness Touch the Brightness soft key to change this display When in this display you may select display brightness with the headlights on and the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Mode Touch the Mode soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status press and release the Day Night or Auto soft key then by touch the arrow back soft key e Language Touch the Language soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the English French Fran ais or Spanish Espa ol soft key to select the language preferred Then touch the arrow back soft key As you continue the information will display in the selected language 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Units Touch the Units soft key to change thi
457. ttings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect System Settings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control
458. ture 214 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory 215 Memory Position Recall 216 Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only 216 E TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 218 B LIGEIS 3 045 488456 E Rx are REOR ese 220 Headlight Switch 0 05 220 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 221 Headlights On With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only 232 SmartBeam If Equipped 221 Headlight Time Delay 222 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped ascen Ree ERE Lights On Reminder Fog Lights If Equipped 224 Multifunction Lever lisse 224 Turn SIGNS es nyo etek re See Ree OS 225 Lane Change Assist 000 225 High Low Beam Switch 226 Flash To Pass 1 ee eee ee 226 Front Map Reading Lights 226 Courtesy Lig hisa parias pani pne rarei a Eia 280 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Ambient Lights iura cir ERI oes 228 MI HEATED STEERING WHEEL Interior Lights 2 0 cee cv eee eevee gg ERUPT queda uadetaronsi stent a0 ill WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 230 a ME ds E ELECTRONIC SPEED C
459. turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 15 Sport Mode If Equipped This light will illuminate when the sport mode SPORT is selected This mode provides performance based tuning For further information refer to Sport Mode in Starting And Operating 16 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 17 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 18 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on
460. ty Auto Services Hospitals Parking Air belts In a collision people riding in these areas are port Police Stations Fire Stations or Auto more likely to be seriously injured or killed Dealers Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold using a seat belt properly face and shaded grey Power Seats If Equipped SEATS On models equipped with power seats the switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down forward or rearward or to recline the seatback Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The passenger s seat will move up or down forward or rearward Power Seat Switches 1 Seat Control 2 Seatback Control Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can
461. u can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect sys tem is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone You can replace 4 with any message number shown P y 8 on the screen If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth than these com mands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook e Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Uconnect Phone 8 4 8 4N Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following featu
462. ual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC When ever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving conditions The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows The ESC Off switch is located on the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illu minate To turn the ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunctio
463. uch the Show Time Status soft key to change this display When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sync Time If Equipped Touch the Sync Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may have the radio set the time automatically To change the Sync Time setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key Safety Assistance e Front Collision Warning If Equipped Touch the Front Collision Warning soft key to change this display The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status press and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist Touch the Park Assist soft ke
464. um Pump Red Yellow 39 10 Amp Power Steering 52 Fuse Spare Red Module AC Clutch 53 Fuse Spare Relay 48 10 Amp AWD Module Red Front Axle Discon nect MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565 Rear Power Distribution Center ii There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center contains fuses and relays 812da393 Rear Power Distribution Center 81344fb9 Opening The Access Cover 566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M tridge Description e When installing the power distribution center ity Fuse Fuse cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly 2 60 Amp Front PDC Feed 1 positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may Yellow allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system 3 Fuse spare failure 4 60 Amp Front PDC Feed 2 When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use Yellow only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The 5 30 Amp Sunroof use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may Pink result in a dangerous electrical system overload If 6 40 Amp Exterior Lighting 1 a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates Green a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 7 40 Amp Exterior Lighting 2 Green 8 30 Amp Interior Lighting Pink Washer Pump ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
465. ument Panel Lens Cleaning 559 Integrated Power Module Fuses 561 Interior Appearance Care sess 558 Interior Lights i sea Rene ec are eee 228 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 230 Introduction xx ee rae GAG eee Re ees a 4 Jack Location 2230 e244e0h4e ea dee sd eas 500 Jack Operations cese niches Eka ape Radon 499 Jump Starting senis wee exe eto 509 Key In Reminder 2 05344 04403 34444449304 14 Keyless Enter N Go 0 000 000 eee 35 Keyless Entry System is ceres metie ake a e ae 21 Keyless 30 5 ea aseara ee nia oe a s NW E 12 Key Programming soss esae Ta ia nahii iaaa 17 Key Replacement llle 16 KEYS t acsi Rae b eg a ade edu doe 12 Key Sentry Immobilizer llle 15 Kicker Sound System 0 6 0 0 daier ya 366 Knee Bolsters a sss ese y so ies ie rx 59 Lane Change and Turn Signals 225 Lane Change Assist s sdb e gore dores 225 en INDEX 607 Lap Shoulder Belts cesa iers arae e s 49 LatcheS3 5 5 a ec ae Rr drs anand ER Par ee ae as 101 Lateh Plates terre 46 aper doe PE eae a haow CUR 50 Lead Free Gasoline 2 ee ee 470 Weaks Ehudi raa teer dug d Ge ASR ea eee 101 Lie of TIES cea aucem e dee BRIA dewey GAL RRR ded 455 Light Bulbs caue RR Re reme 101 LightS eie be x SERRE 101 Puer Drs 66 Alarm uacua EG ee s aed kc eH 319 Anti Lock 2 222225 4 500424 834008 449 Es 319 Automatic Headlights 4 2
466. until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF posit
467. upport visit the following website e www UconnectPhone com e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use All atten tion should be focused on safely operating the ve hicle Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone Button is used to get into the phone mode and make ca
468. ur air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental 538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation 1 Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips 072610690 Access Door 2 Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539 Filter Access Cover A C Air Filter 3 Remove the used filter 5 Close the filter access cover 4 Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals vehicle text and arrows on the filter will indicate this 540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Body Lubr
469. ur authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter an
470. uries The curtains deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 iy NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during NING neonate e If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to impacts that require air bag occupant protection WARNING your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should remain SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt free from any obstructions restraint system Occupants including children who are e Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be between you and
471. urposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Rear Head Restraints The center head restraint has two positions up or down When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head NOTE The outboard head restraints are not adjustable restraint To lower the head restraint press the push Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know button located at the base of the head restraint and push Before Starting Your Vehicle for tether routing downward on the head restraint Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an mm additional storage area To fold the rear seatback pull on the loops located on the upper seatback 022636837 Push Button 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx NOTE These loops can be tucked away when not in use Folded Rear Seatback 030936862 When the seatback is folde
472. us menu e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlight With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash whe n the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Sound Horn With L
473. using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the SET S button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC if equipped To recall the memory settings for driver 1 press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK b
474. uto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings will be available e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Auto On Driver Heated Ventilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available Easy Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous me
475. utton on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver 2 press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 on the driver s door during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped stop mov ing A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver s seat moves depends on where you have the driver s seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver s seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver s seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for
476. ve cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571 Interior Bulbs Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Bulb Number Optional Door Map Pocket Cup Holder LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Rear Courtesy Reading W5W Low Beam Headlamp H11 Lamps Standard Halogen Rear Compartment 562 Low Beam Headlamp D3 Serviced at Autho Trunk Lamp High Intensity Discharge rized Dealer Overhead Console Read 578 HID ing Lamp High Beam Headlamp 9005 Visor Vanity Lamps A6220 Front Park Turn Lamp 3157A Glove Box Lamp If 194 Front Fog Lamp If PSX24W Equipped Equipped Door Courtesy 562 Front Side Marker 168 Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140 Rear Tail Lamp LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer replacement instructions For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for Rear Stop Turn Lamp LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Rear Side Marker 168 572 MAINTAINI
477. vehicle do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury Continued EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 509 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tight ness of each lug nut is 110 ft lbs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jumpestarting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do
478. vehicle to an authorized dealer for service ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges 574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Backup Lamps 5 Reinstall new bulb 1 Open trunk 6 Install cover and fastener 2 Remove fastener from cover License Lamp 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 3 Remove cover 4 Twist the bulb one quarter turn to remove MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws 818db273 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate All Engines 19 Gallons 72 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3 6 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 6 Liter Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Cool 10 Quarts 9 5 Liters ant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formul
479. vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver s seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver s seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition in the ACC or RUN position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver s seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy m Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Tuo latches sumet be released to open the hood catch to the left The safety catch is located under the p l center front edge of the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 031305159 Hood Safety Catch Hood Release Lever N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 CAUTION WARNING To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to Be sure
480. ver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of the air bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children ee
481. ver away from you as desired 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System Touch the Controls soft key then touch the Heated Steering Wheel soft key to turn on the heated steering wheel Press the Heated Steering Wheel soft key a second time to turn the heated steering wheel off Player EVE OFF Controls Climate Controls Soft Key Phone rL
482. xt message inbox i shown tui Uo tsa Whaat ates posting Fe Uccrnec prona titan y on the steering wheel Information Provided by d DEZAL LER ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 NOTE You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other e You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect sys tem is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone You can replace 4 with any message number shown on the screen If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth than these com mands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Hands Free Calling Universal amp Connect Commands The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel Cancels Bluetooth Phone List of connected listening to Settings screen Bluetooth paired your voice will be shown audio devices will command Con
483. y parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately The Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop The clicking sound of solenoid valves Brake pedal pulsations and Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti l
484. y be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the sve button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the EVR button and say Send 374 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry and or Last Name as Voice Password then if you press the EvRbutton and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phone book entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se
485. y pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds 81ac2fd7 Trunk Release Button With the ignition in the ON RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for more information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Trunk Emergency Release As a security measure a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism Trunk Emergency Internal Rel
486. y to change this display The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status press and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and operating information e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the outside rear view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Blind Spot Alert Touch the Blind Spot Alert soft key to change this dis play When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Moni tor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual al
487. your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams SmartBeam If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams softkey until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights Smart Beam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights If Available When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Steering Directed Lights If Equipped When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights softkey es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previo
488. ystem will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section Engine Oil Viscosity 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatu

2013 Dodge Charger Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents